Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. In the steps that follow.Type: Each family can have several types. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. such as a 30” X 42” title block. In the following illustration. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. the user interface is labeled. A type can also be a style. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . A type can be a specific size of a family. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. specifically its clear user interface. making it easy to understand what each button represents. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. click . This creates a new project based on the default template. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use.

the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well. and View. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. click Toolbar. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Edit. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You then click the command name to run the command. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu.By default. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. While working in the drawing area. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. TIP For example. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. In addition. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. click Structural Wall. If you select the Beam tool. notice a beam type is specified. click Beam. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. click Design Bars. 6 On the Design Bar. if you intend to add a beam. 9 In the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. notice the list of columns that are available. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. First. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. Within the drawing area. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 . click Structural Column.

and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. click the tab. 11 Click OK. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. immediately below the Type Selector. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar.

select Views (all).The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . In the Project Browser.

12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . and groups. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or . schedules. You can right-click in the browser to add. 14 On the Settings menu.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. family category (beams. families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. reports. To open a view. walls). 3D). You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. families. click Browser Organization. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. columns. and rename views.sign next to the name. elevations. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. and groups of your current project. double-click the name. 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is also dockable. delete. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and group name. sheets.

Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . click Modify. In the bottom left corner of the window. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Do not click.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Cancel." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Structural Wall. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. In this case. After you create a browser organization scheme. The cursor is displayed as a pencil.

click . Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can use this tri-pane. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. When you place the cursor over a component. press SHIFT+F1. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. and click to get the topic associated with the window. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. in conjunction with tooltips. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. Tooltips: To see tooltips. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. If there is no Help button displayed. Windows: From any window. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. After you are familiar with these tasks. The Status Bar also provides information. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. regarding selected components within a view. find a keyword on the Index tab. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. There are several tools that help you find information. In the Status Bar. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. Click the Help button. 20 Press TAB. press F1 to get help on that dialog.

Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. the view zooms out from the structural model. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . click Training Files. For example. In the tutorials.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. In the following steps. In the drawing area. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.

this is referred to as a crossing selection. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.6 On the View toolbar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms in on the selected area. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. To modify or add snap increments. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. and click Help. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. 18 On the Undo menu. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click Settings menu ➤ Options. Move. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. . click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. on the View toolbar. In this example. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. select the second item in the list. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 .11 To display SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. 16 To exit the wheel.

click the Undo command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. Some commands. click Modify. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. and click again to end it.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . 21 To end the command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. on the Standard toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. On the Design Bar. click Lines.

You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. 19 . highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will create and name a new steel project. When you finish these tutorials. beams. Structural Modelling In this lesson. and a concrete slab to the model. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. You then add structural walls. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. Finally. beam systems. you create a 5-story steel structure. columns.

3 In the Choose Template dialog. when a dashed line displays. Adding New Levels In this exercise. click Browse. click Level.1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and click Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). and press ENTER. and double-click North. you create additional levels for your structure. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. On the Options Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding New Levels on page 20. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. click to create Level 3. click (Pick Lines). Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. and for Offset.rvt. click OK. open the Imperial Templates folder. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. enter 12' 0". click the Level 2 reference line. ■ ■ In the drawing area. select Structural Analysis-Default .rvt. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial.rte. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 12' 0".

and Level 5). Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 .4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. each with the offset value set to 12' 0". 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. 5 Press ESC.

select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. Click Open. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. Notice that Level 2 is bold. click symbol as shown. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. Select Current view only. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning.rvt.dwg. Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. (Zoom In). 3 In the Import/Link dialog. click Training Files. i_RST_EW_Modelling. select Black and White. select Auto . For Positioning. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan.Center to Center. For Colors.

click drawing. click Query. click Hide in View. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . and in the Import Instance Query dialog. drag it beyond the dimensions. 9 In the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing. and click to place the symbol.5 Click the elevation symbol. select a single column. 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. . Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar.

Notice that all columns disappear. (Undo). 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids. click . 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. click Grid. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit).rvt. Adding Column Grids on page 24. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 10 On the Toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice that it is labeled 2. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

10 On the Options Bar. click Grid. As you select subsequent grid lines. 7 On the Design Bar. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. labels display in numerical sequence.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. enter A. NOTE When you select a grid line. and press ENTER. Adding Column Grids | 25 . Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. click . and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. click Modify. The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. 12 Click the value within the grid bubble.

18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A. and then OK. click Modify. Under Halftone. 19 Enter ZF. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.dwg file. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. The last grid line is labeled G. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 15 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Structural Walls on page 27. this view is referred to as the plan view. For the remainder of this tutorial. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. Adding Structural Walls | 27 .rvt. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and enter ZF. select Basic Wall : Generic . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 10 Using the drawing as a guide. this view is referred to as the 3D view. click Structural Wall. . 9 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 6 On the View toolbar.8" Masonry. For the remainder of this tutorial. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. and place the first structural wall as shown. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view.2 On the View toolbar. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. click center of the drawing. click (3D). select Finish Face: Exterior. click . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify.12 Using the same method. 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar.

30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts. and using the architectural drawing as a guide. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls.

(Mirror). The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side. click 20 Click grid D. Adding Structural Walls | 31 .19 On the Toolbar.

22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you add columns at specific grid intersections. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Columns on page 32.21 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2.

5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column. . and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. click Structural Column. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. 6 Using the same method. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . 4 In the Type Selector.rvt.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. click structure. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. 2 On the View toolbar.

Columns are placed at each grid intersection. 11 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43.7 On the Design Bar. and enter ZF. Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. click Modify. 14 Click inside the 3D view. 10 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. 13 On the Toolbar. click (Grid Intersection). 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. click structure. 2 On the View toolbar. click Beam. click Chain. Adding Structural Beams | 35 . 4 In the Type Selector. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure. 5 On the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.

8 Using the same method. place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. that is. and select the beam between A6 and A5. A5. and press ENTER. and A6. Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. enter 5' 0". The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. 10 Click the column at grid location A6. press CTRL. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines.Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. click . 11 On the Toolbar. and enter ZF. click Beam. This project does not require sloped beams. click . Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. Adding Structural Beams | 37 . select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.

click Finish. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 19 On the Design Bar. Beams are placed within the grid. click through A5. 18 Click inside the 3D view. and press DELETE. 20 Click inside the plan view. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. click Modify. . 21 On the View toolbar.17 On the Options Bar. and enter ZF.

29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. click Beam. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. Adding Structural Beams | 39 . 25 On the View toolbar. click . 27 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. between grid lines G2 and G5.23 Using the same method. 24 Click inside the plan view.

30 Using the same method. place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click . Adding Structural Beams | 41 . 34 On the View toolbar. click .31 Select the 3 new beams. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. and on the Toolbar. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. and press DELETE.

38 Click inside the 3D view.36 On the View toolbar. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft. click . and enter ZF. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. and press DELETE.

42 In the Type Selector. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3.Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. 40 On the View toolbar. click Beam. This is the endpoint for the first beam. click center of the structure. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . 39 Click inside the plan view. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. This is the startpoint for the first beam. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26.

and on the Toolbar. click Modify. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. 46 On the Design Bar. 48 Click the beam on grid line D . This is the endpoint for the third beam. click . 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. This is the endpoint for the second beam. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4.

Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise. Adding Structural Beams | 45 . 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view.

click ■ ■ ■ . Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. under Constraints. Under Category. and then click OK. 55 On the Options Bar. select Other. do the following: For z-Direction Justification. Click OK. do the following: Click Check None.53 On the Options Bar. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -0' 5". For z-Direction Offset Value. select Structural Framing (Girder). click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). select Structural Framing (Joist). Under Category. 54 In the Filter dialog. Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Click Apply.

and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction.rvt. i_RST_EW_Modelling.57 Click File menu ➤ Save. select 3D. Click OK. for Layout Rule. select Maximum Spacing. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. 5 On the View toolbar. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. click Beam System. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . 3 On the Options Bar. click of the structure. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. enter 9' 0". Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. . 58 Proceed to the next exercise. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. For Maximum Spacing. Under Pattern. For Beam Type.

Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. and enter ZF. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. click Modify. 7 Click to place the beam system. Also. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. 10 Click inside the 3D view. 8 Using the same settings and method.

Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. click Slab. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 .rvt. and enter ZF. You are now in sketch mode. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 3 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. click Lines.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. zoom in and out as needed. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections.4 On the View toolbar. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. When sketching the slab. click structure. If necessary.

Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. click . 11 On the Toolbar. Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines.

Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar. . 16 On the Design Bar. click line D.13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Lines. 14 Enter ZF. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch.

and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. 21 Enter ZF.18 On the View toolbar. click Lines. . click grid line D. click Lines. 23 On the Design Bar. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 22 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. .

26 Enter ZF. 28 On the Design Bar. 27 On the View toolbar. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. click Lines. 31 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. . and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF. click structure. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

you copy columns. beams. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view.In the Revit dialog. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. beam systems. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt.

select Up to level: Level 5. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. Under Category. 5 On the Options Bar.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. Click OK. do the following: For Top Constraint. and then click OK. Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. do the following: Click Check None. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. select Walls. and enter ZF. .

select Level 5. Click Apply. 10 On the Options Bar. Under Category. and then click OK. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and draw a selection box around the entire view. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. . under Constraints. and then click OK. 9 In the Filter dialog.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. select Level 3. do the following: Click Check None. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: For Top Level. select Structural Columns. 14 In the Select Levels dialog. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . Click OK. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. enter 4' 0". Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. For Top Offset. 8 On the Options Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click Apply. click ■ ■ . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. Structural Beam Systems. and then click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. do the following: For Base Offset. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . while pressing CTRL. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. enter 0' 0'. For Top Offset. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view. select Floors. Structural Framing (Girder). and then click OK. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and draw a selection box around the entire structure. Under Category. 20 In the Filter dialog. do the following: Click Check None. enter 4' 0". Click OK.Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. under Constraints. select Level 3 and Level 5. and Structural Framing (Joist).

2 Enter ZF. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. Adding Foundations In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Foundations | 59 . click Modify.rvt. Adding Foundations on page 59. double-click Level 1. under Structural Plans.

and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. 4 In the Type Selector. Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 7 On the Toolbar. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18". 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click . All the structural columns are highlighted. 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. 5 On the Options Bar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Finish. click (Structural Column).3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click 19 Enter ZF. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Foundations | 61 . The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. select 12" Foundation Slab. 14 On the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Slab. (3D). 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. You are now in sketch mode. for Type. and click OK. click Lines. 18 On the View toolbar.10 Select both footings. and press DELETE. click Floor Properties.

and modify its line properties. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Structural Detailing In this lesson. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section. Next. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. Finally. Structural Detailing on page 62. you place it in an existing project sheet. You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow.

5 In the New Drafting View dialog. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0".rvt. click Training Files.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. but do not open it. Click OK.dwg. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. click Training Files. ■ Click Save As. you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet.

select Black and White. For Positioning. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Click Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.rvt. select Auto .Center to Center.■ ■ For Colors.

Notice that Level 1 is bold. click Section. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . From the adjacent drop-down list of views. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a section that references an existing detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. click . Select the Reference other view option. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the Project Browser.1.Unnamed. expand select Sheets (all). move the cursor down. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. and double-click S. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. and click inside the north wall to place the section. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows).rvt. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 4 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Release the mouse button. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 .Sheet S-1 . click Level 1 on the sheet.Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area.

Notice the detail drawing outline. 8 Click to place the detail. 7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

click corner of the sheet. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . and click ENTER.In the structural plan view of Level 1. change it to S-1. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar.0. notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. .

Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number.rvt. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .In the structural plan view of Level 1.

and double-click Typical Wall Section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Click on the detail drawing.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. click . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 .

11 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Weight. 9 Click the CONT5 row. notice the Layer value CONT5. select 4. 14 Click OK. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. 6 Click OK. 12 Click OK. 8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click Apply.

TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 . i_RST_EW_Detailing. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73.rvt. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 .rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 3 In the Insert Views dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. select Show all views and sheets. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise.TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK.Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet. click Training Files.TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 .TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 .

74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click to place the detail. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise. 9 Release the mouse button. Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and drag 001 .TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Click OK. 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet.

double-click Level 3 . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75.T. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 .13 Click File menu ➤ Save.S. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.O. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. i_RST_EW_Detailing. and close all other views. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. click . Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

as shown. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle.Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 20 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise.

click Modify. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. click (Move). Adding Detail Components | 93 . 26 On the Toolbar.24 Click to place the bolt. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown.

28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . as shown.

29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle. Adding Detail Components | 95 .

click Detail Component. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 31 In the Type Selector. 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. Adding Detail Components | 97 . click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. as shown. and then click the lock for the alignment. click (Align). 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click 38 Click OK. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. 35 Select the L-angle. as shown. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. .33 Click to place the L-angle. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam.

rvt. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you will add break lines and annotation to the section view.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. 8 Click to place the break line. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. to the right of the coping detail. as shown. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. as shown. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later. select Break Line.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click to place the break line. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 .

10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. 14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line. click Modify. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 11 Click to place the break line.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. Click to finish the first leader segment. 18 Click in the drawing area. click Text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). Move the cursor up and to the right. away from the text box. Move the cursor to the right. as shown.15 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN).

22 Click on the leader.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. 23 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right. click Modify. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. Click to finish the first leader segment. Click to finish the second leader segment. click (Add Left Leader).

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . as shown.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam. 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box.

Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the first leader segment. (One Segment). click 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Click in the drawing area. Move the cursor down and to the right. as shown. SECTIONS FOR REINF. 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 31 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). away from the text box. away from the text box. Move the cursor to the left. ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. 28 Click in the drawing area. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. EXPANSION ANCHORS. click Text. Click to finish the second leader segment. 27 On the Options Bar. INFO). Move the cursor to the right. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle.C. click Text. Click to finish the leader segment.

35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 . as shown.

106 .

and your username when using worksets. and set it as your default template. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. These settings control the graphics. click Training Files. In the second lesson. click the Graphics tab. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you create an office template.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. 9 In the New Project dialog. notification preferences. selection default options. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. journal cleanup options. which is independent of the project settings. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. you modify the system environment. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 5 Under Colors. click Browse.rte. select Invert background color. In the first lesson. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Finally. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. click OK. 4 In the Options dialog. and click OK. 107 . they are not saved to project or template files. under Template file. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 7 In the New Project dialog.

15 Under Notifications. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the value for Selection Color. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. click Modify. For Tooltip Assistance. click No. 16 Click OK. the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Under Colors.rvt. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. select None. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select One hour. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. and click OK. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. select yellow. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Structural Wall. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Click the General tab. 13 In the Color dialog. 11 In the Options dialog. When an error occurs. 24 When prompted to save. select One hour. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the wall. click the Graphics tab. 20 On the Design Bar. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

and click Browse to select a template. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure. click the File Locations tab. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. For Selection Color. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. 5 Under Default path for user files. Under Journal File Cleanup. click Browse. Under Windows Username.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. under Default path for family template files. and the family template files. clear Invert background color. the family libraries. 2 In the Options dialog. If prompted. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. click Browse. click Browse. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. and click Open. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you specify your default file locations. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. Specifying File Locations | 109 . They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. Your login name displays by default. 7 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. TIP To view a template. as well as the material and rendering libraries. select the folder to save your files to by default. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 28 In the Options dialog. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. do not save the changes. These files are used primarily in the software support process. you can start a new project with that template. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). select Red. Specifying File Locations on page 109. 3 Under Default template file. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 4 Click Cancel. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.

Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or loading a Revit Structure file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. and click on the right-side of the field. and notice the list of library names. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. centralized. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. You can modify the existing library names and path. click (Add Value). (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the following illustration. saving. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 10 Under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. click Place. NOTE When you are opening. However. and change the name to My Library.This path is set automatically during the installation process. such as in a large. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 8 Click Cancel. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files.

Load. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Specifying File Locations | 111 . and select it as the library path. templates. and Import dialogs. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. 21 Under Libraries. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Under Library Name. Save. 20 Click the File Locations tab. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open. If you work in a large office. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. click My Library. select My Library. or families. click the My Library icon. and click Open. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and click OK. TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. 18 Click Cancel.

click the Spelling tab. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Click File menu ➤ Exit. click template. click OK. do not save the changes. 22 In the text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 Under Settings. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click OK. click Restore Defaults. 5 In the text editor. 23 In the Options dialog. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Spelling tab. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If prompted. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 11 In the Options dialog.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Under Settings. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Text. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 19 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. click Edit.

snapping reverts to the system default settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. You can turn snap settings on and off. under Template file. and enter 1. you modify snap settings. work with snapping turned off. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. click Browse. For example. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap increments. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click OK.rte. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Object Snaps. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 6 Under Dimension Snaps. 4 In the New Project dialog.. click Training Files. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. As you zoom in and out within a view. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. click Structural Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 2 In the New Project dialog.25 Proceed to the next exercise. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.

enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. If it does not. Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. While sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. click Modify. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.10 Click in the center of the drawing area. and move the cursor to the right. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. This is the increment that you added previously. and click Wall.

you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and the wall edges. and do not save the file. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.rvt. 23 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and specify the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the midpoint. 3 Click (Duplicate). Make sure you also delete the semicolon.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When a model component is loaded into a project. and select Concrete . Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 20 Move the cursor downward. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Modifying Project Settings on page 115. 2 Scroll down. it will snap to the endpoints. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings. Finally.Precast Concrete for Name. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click Training Files. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . save the project file with a unique name. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. 17 Enter SM. You create and modify materials. Using these options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. If you move the cursor along the wall. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and delete the value 1". and object styles. and use it to complete the exercises.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. When you apply a material to a component. fill patterns. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. annotations. lines. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

. click Modify. select Concrete-Precast for Name. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. and click OK. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. Fnd. Wall. and select the remaining exterior walls. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. click This is the material you created previously. and click OK. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. and double-click T. 13 In the Materials dialog. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. 16 Press CTRL. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Type Selector. 15 Select the left foundation wall. click Edit. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Custom for the new wall name. and click . 10 In the Value field for Structure. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Precast. and click OK.O. select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. enter Concrete . 8 Click Duplicate. 12 On the right side of the Material field. 18 On the Design Bar. 9 Enter Foundation .

zoom into the model. Click Render. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118.19 On the View Toolbar. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and select Rendering. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. select Best. 22 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. the material that you created is displayed. In the following exercise. The rendering process begins. 21 In the drawing area. click Rendering dialog. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. click . draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. When it is finished.

Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 5 Click New. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. choose Model. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. click Custom. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. i_Settings-in progress.rvt. rotate. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Import. click Show Model. under Display. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. such as steel. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way.23 On the Rendering dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 3 Under Pattern Type. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and move model patterns. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed. expand Elevations. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.rvt. and double-click West. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. You can align. 7 Under Custom.

click 20 Under Surface Pattern. 25 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click OK. click Modify. click Edit. 12 Click OK.pat from the Common folder. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . and click OK. click in the Material field for Layer 2. click . Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar.TIP Typically. 10 Under Custom. to select a fill pattern. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the wall. select Model. click . adjust your zoom settings as needed. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. 26 On the View Toolbar. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. TIP If the pattern does not display. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. . and click Open. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. under Pattern Type. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 24 Click OK 3 times. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click . 17 In the Value field for Structure. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 23 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New.

Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses.rvt. there are often multiple trusses within a project. i_Settings-in progress. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. For example. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .28 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3D. 2 On the keyboard. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

5 In the Object Styles dialog. under Custom Colors. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Notice the line color is applied to the wall.3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line. expand Walls. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. 6 Under Category. select Blue. 8 In the Color dialog. click Show categories from all disciplines. click OK. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 121 . 7 Under the Walls category. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. double-click the Line Color field.

9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Click OK. under Floor Plans. expand Structural Framing.O. You have created a new line pattern. Fnd. 8 On the View Control Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and select Web Joist. click Model Graphics Style. (example: plan view).Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. now you must apply it. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. click New. select Truss. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Hidden Line. enter Truss for Name. i_Settings-in progress.rvt. Wall. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. double-click T. Under Line Pattern. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view.

expand Structural Framing. 13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 15 Click OK twice.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and select Web Joist for Visibility. Select Blue for Line Color. Select Truss for Line Pattern. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight.

specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. equally spaced as shown below. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. 25 In the Options Bar. Click . and click OK. select Underslab Drainage. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines. Click OK. . double-click T. under Modify Subcategories. Select Red for Line Color. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . 18 In the Line Styles dialog. Slab. click Lines. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Options Bar. click New. under Floor Plans. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 In the Type Selector.O. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name.

36 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 31 In the Project Browser. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. i_Settings-in progress. Modifying Annotations on page 125. 34 Click OK. 4 Enter Linear . Modifying Annotations | 125 . This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. expand Lines. and clear Underslab Drainage. and clear Underslab Drainage. and click OK. click the default value for Units Format. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 33 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines.27 On the View Toolbar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 30 Click OK. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 29 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. click . You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number.Imperial for name. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view. 5 Under Text. double-click Level 1. click Duplicate.

and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. and click OK. 15 Under Loaded Tags. 7 Click OK twice. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. under Floor Plans. Under Category. Structural Framing Tag. verify that Create is clear. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. click Training Files.rfa. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag. Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. Wall. The remaining untagged beams are tagged.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. click Modify. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Click a beam. click Tag ➤ By Category. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.Imperial dimension available. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. the other displays the instance value. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click T. Fnd. You have created a new dimension style.O. 16 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. 12 Click Load. . notice that there is a Linear . click Structural Framing Tag. 14 In the Tags dialog. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. In the Type Selector. 21 Under Leader. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the View Toolbar.

and click OK.unless there is an override. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select Openings. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. you modify the detail level assignments.24 Proceed to the next exercise.Temporary Dimensions. In the first section. select SF for Unit suffix. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 5 In the Format dialog. In this project. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Specifying Units of Measurement. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog.rvt. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. click . and click OK. 6 Click OK. In the final section. In the second section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. i_Settings-in progress. and Detail Level Options on page 127. click the default value for Format. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement.Temporary Dimensions. dimension values display using this setting. under Length. and Detail Level Options | 127 . select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 8 Under Walls. Specifying Units of Measurement. click the default value for Format. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 12 Click OK. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. dimensions use these project settings. Unless there is an override. You do not select a view scale to move it. 3 In the Format dialog. Temporary Dimensions. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you specify the project units of measurement . Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. In this table. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. under Area.

Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In this exercise. NOTE In this exercise.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Sheets (all). 15 Proceed to the next exercise.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. click Training Files. and double-click Completed Project.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. 16 Click the Views tab. expand each view type. 21 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped based on phase. expand each sheet set. On the Project Browser. and click New. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Discipline. 8 Select Phase. under Views. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. under Sheets. and click OK. and click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. select Type/Discipline. click the Folders tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . 10 In the Project Browser. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click Apply. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 12 Click the Sheets tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 5 On the Views tab.

expand Views ➤ Elevations. select Project for Create new. navigate to your preferred directory. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. and double-click Building Elevation. and click Open. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. 6 In the Project Browser. you create an office template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from. If your work requires a variety of templates. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Whenever you create a new project or template.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. click Browse.rte template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. preloaded families. In this lesson. and click OK. You can also save these settings in a template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. 2 Under Template File. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. enter a unique file name. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. If you want to save this file. For example. dimensions styles. and view names. you select the starting point for your structural template. named print settings. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. the same rules apply. and rendered scenes in a template. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. When you create new projects. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. levels. such as structural or construction. 5 Click OK. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. and Discipline. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Depending on your needs. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. when you create a new project. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Type. In the lesson that follows. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. Other than the default template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template.

Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. When you create the material. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. 11 Under Template File. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. drag a zoom region around the level heads. close them. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. select Project Template. 13 Click Open. Other templates. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. weights. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 Select a default template. 8 In the Project Browser. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. such as the structural template. you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. and click OK. If you want to use a template other than the default. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . you can select it now. in the drawing area. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. 14 Under Create New. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For example. If you have additional projects open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework.

RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. and one for annotation symbol line styles. line colors. one for perspective model line styles. see the previous lesson. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. line patterns. create and modify them as needed. You can align. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. create new subcategories.During this exercise. 2 Scroll down the Name list. In the dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. You can add and delete view scales. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. and create new subcategories as needed. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. or modify existing patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. 11 If necessary. and move model patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you can set line weights. specific modifications are not dictated. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. For more details on modifying these settings. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. In the Object Styles dialog. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. Observe the materials that are already defined. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. or refer to the Help documentation. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . rotate. 13 Modify categories. Modifying System Settings on page 107. 7 Click OK when finished.

28 Click OK. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. modify the line weight. 32 Click OK. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and specify the properties. name the style. line color. Linear. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. name the style. To see the details of a particular style. 30 For existing line categories. angular. click Duplicate. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. select it from this list. and click Edit. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. or line pattern as needed. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. and dimensions. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. and specify the properties. tags.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. select it. 31 If necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 38 Click OK. select it from this list. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. To see the details of a particular style. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 26 To modify a line pattern. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 23 Click OK. click Duplicate. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.

Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. In the Tags dialog. and choose a decimal symbol. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. and Angle settings. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 60 Click OK. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP In the drawing area. 58 Under Walls. 62 Review the table. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. Medium. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 48 To load new annotation tags. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags.44 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. The detail level is based on view scale. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. click Load. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 55 Specify the Slope option. and click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. or Fine. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. For example. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and move view scales as needed. Using the arrows between the columns. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 53 Click OK. 59 Under Doors and Windows. When you create a new view. 51 Under Length. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. click Format. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 56 Click OK. Volume. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category.

65 In the Browser Organization dialog. and select Properties. 70 If necessary.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. create new browser organization types. In certain projects. 66 Delete. For example. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. 63 Click OK. create new browser organization types. To move the view scales. or from the roof looking down (down direction). you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 69 Delete. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 67 If necessary. or Edit existing organization types. click View Direction. click the Views tab. 71 Click OK. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Edit/New. click the arrows between columns. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. Rename. or Edit existing organization types. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In a typical project. Rename. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. 68 Click the Sheets tab. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries.

you can save rendered scene settings to a template. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. However. Use the table below as a checklist. For example. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Although these settings can be saved within a template. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. and framing tags.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You can find additional information in Help. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Each command is available on the Settings menu. In such a case. If necessary. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. This could be useful for things such as title blocks.

Depending on the intended use of this template. do so before starting this exercise. titleblocks. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. If necessary. For example. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. Although this is possible. However. If this selection is satisfactory. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. you may want to delete. 3 To modify. and click OK. brace symbols. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Click Duplicate. and click OK. enter a name. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Obviously. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. modify. In the Element Properties dialog. click Beam. select Edit/New. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . create. there are some important thoughts to consider. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Although the options are endless. In addition. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. In the steps that follow. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. and column symbols. Make modifications. select it. you do both. Modify type properties. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you can move onto the next component type. select Edit/New. click on the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. and beams. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. select Load. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. you could load detail components. You can load any family or group into a template. or add to this selection. For example. if you loaded every beam type you could find.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or load a new beam type. and click OK.

10 In the Type Properties dialog.4 Click OK. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Families. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. and select the titleblock type. click Preview.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. create. click Load. right-click the component. and click Delete. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. load. To do so. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Notice that each family category is listed. This titleblock is currently part of the template. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Press ESC twice to return to the template. 12 Click OK. 11 To load a titleblock.

you save time and increase consistency. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Discipline. At any time. and make modifications. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . select the view. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. In addition.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. In this exercise. you create the views required for your template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and select Apply View Template. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In this exercise. you can apply a view template to any view. you created new projects using different templates. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. select Structural Framing Plan. 4 If necessary. View Range. 2 For Name. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. and double-click Level 1. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. right-click. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 6 Click OK. Detail Level. 3 Specify each value as needed. rename or duplicate the view template. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates.

and notice the context menu includes options to rename. You can also duplicate or delete the view. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. and select Rename. 17 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. If necessary. double-click Level 2. click Apply. under Structural Plans. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. 12 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. 27 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. Black levels have no associated views. click 26 In the Project Browser. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. if desired. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 11 Click Apply. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Create additional levels as needed. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. 28 Rename the 3D View. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. double-click Building Elevation. under Elevations. review the existing floor plans. select the view in the Project Browser. select Make Plan View. and click OK. After the template is applied. and apply the appropriate template. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. open the view from the Project Browser.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. and click OK. 21 In the Options Bar. or delete them as needed. duplicate. expand 3D Views. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under 3D Views. You can rename this view. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or delete this view. duplicate. right-click Level 1. Rename. right-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. 20 To add additional levels to the template. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. To do so. 18 In the Project Browser. review the Structural plans and elevations. under Structural Plans. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view.

Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Filter tab. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. select the category type. on the View toolbar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 .29 To create additional 3D views. click Schedule/Quantities. assign filters. and click OK. Save the view 32 To save the view. click . and modify their properties accordingly. click . select and order required fields. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. modify settings. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Using this dialog. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. supply a view name. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. You may want to add schedules to a template. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often.

or on the sheet itself. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. To do so. click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. select the titleblock and delete it. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. and click OK. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. beams. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 36 Click OK. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. modify settings. You are prompted to select a titleblock. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. On the Appearance tab. After the sheet is created. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. and columns. 41 Create new sheets as needed. and click OK. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. and modify their properties accordingly. double-click the sheet number. select one. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. select the default titleblock. click Sheet. and click Rename. modify settings. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. You can still add views to the sheet. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings.

The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 .) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143.3 Under General. When you import a DWG or DXF file.txt). ■ 5 Click OK. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.

They cannot be shared with other projects. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog.2 For each category. windows. they become the set mappings for the project. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and related multi-category tags and schedules. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. 8 In the dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. doors. 5 For each category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory.txt) for MicroStation. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. therefore. For example. These settings are retained within the project template. 9 Click Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. for example. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. name the file. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. and unlike shared parameters. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and so on. click Save As. When scheduling. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and click Save. they cannot be used to tag objects. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. project parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. and so on. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. click Save As. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. name the file. Using shared parameters. and click Save. When you save these mappings to a text file.16). Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog.

17 Under Discipline. click New. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 27 Click OK. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 18 Under Type. and select a shared parameter. 8 Under Parameters. After the file is named.In this exercise. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. add required parameters. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. click Add. If a file already exists. you can create a list of parameters. 2 Click Create. select Project parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and select Shared Parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 14 Click Add. 24 Click Select. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. Creating Named Print Settings. 21 Click OK. 7 Under Parameter group. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 3 Name and save the file. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and specify the Type. click New. select a parameter discipline type. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 5 Enter the group name. This allows you to name the external parameter file. and click OK when finished. 9 Name the parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 10 Click OK. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select a parameter value type. For each parameter group. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 25 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. and click OK. enter a parameter name. 22 Add project parameters as needed. you can begin creating parameter groups. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 . Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 16 Under Name. under Groups. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson.

For information on creating multi-category tags. By creating named settings within the template. enter a name for the schedule. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. and click Open. The tag is now part of the template. 34 Under Name. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and the percent of actual size. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. select the tag. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields. you can set options such as sheet sizes. you create named print settings. and print. and click OK. 2 Under Name. click OK. and add them to your default template file. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you need only select a setting. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. or consult the Help documentation. click Schedule/Quantities. 36 When you have completed the schedule. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. paper placement. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. make minor modifications if necessary. you can load them into the template. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. For each printer.

4 Click Save As.3 Under Settings. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 6 Modify the printer settings. and create additional settings as needed. click Setup. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . click New. 5 In the New dialog.

click Browse. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. select a different printer. 18 Select the template. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this lesson. If you need to share this file with others. select Template Files (*. Use the template 16 To use the template. you should save it to a network path. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 22 Next to Default template file. and click Open. 19 Click OK. click Setup. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. and save it as a template file. You can also set this template as your default template. The only remaining task is to save it. and create new settings for this printer. select it. 14 Under Save as type. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 17 Select Browse. and saved them to a template. 11 Click OK when finished. and click Save. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 23 Navigate to the template location. loaded components. 15 Name the template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. In addition. 24 Click OK. By investing the time to individualize your template. This can provide a good starting point for a template.9 In the Print dialog. you modified settings. Your template is complete.rte). 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 21 Click the File Locations tab. and click Open.

click Training Files. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. AutoCAD Architecture. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. NOTE For training purposes. Notice that Level 2 is bold. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. click Training Files. and Revit Architecture. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 149 .dwg. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area.rvt. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson.

copy. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. select Auto .Center to Center. paste. 6 On the Options toolbar.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. drag. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. stairs and elevator opening symbols. Click Open. click the imported/linked file. and rotate the view as one object. 5 In the drawing area. select Black and White. However. Exterior facade outlines. you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. For Positioning. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . click drawing area. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view.

9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and select the latest available format. Creating a Structural Model on page 161.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.dwg. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. click Training Files. In the Xref Manager dialog. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1.dwg. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. expand Views (all). select Export to AutoCAD. select the Imported Categories tab. click Training Files. and expand Structural Plans. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. and click OK. In the next tutorial. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. On the File menu. In the next tutorial. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. Notice that Level 2 is bold. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE For training purposes. 1 In the Project Browser. a new training file is supplied. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background.

6 On the Options toolbar. Click Open. For Positioning. select Auto . click the imported/linked file. click the Imported Categories tab. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Exterior facade outlines. stairs. 5 In the drawing area. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and elevator opening symbols. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . select Invert.Origin to Origin.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. click Revit Structure drawing area.

10 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Options toolbar. and click OK. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. click the linked file. 13 Select any column. Click OK.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. click Partial Explode. 11 In the drawing area. Under Constraints. click . enter -1' 0' for Base Offset. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . and on the Option Bar. do the following: ■ ■ .dwg.

Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. In the next tutorial. levels. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select a template file. columns.Origin to Origin. select Project under Create New. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. a new training file is supplied. You can save the open file if desired.rvt. 6 Click Open.Notice the column adjusts to the change. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. walls. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 In the Add Link dialog. and click OK. select Auto . You can copy grids. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Notice that Level 2 is bold. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements. for Positioning. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers.

7 Enter ZF. click the linked file. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. stairs and elevator opening symbols. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. 9 On the Options toolbar. click Revit Structure drawing area. click Options.Exterior facade outlines. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. 8 In the drawing area. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . 11 Click the imported Revit drawing.

columns need to be split at each level. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . When finished. Grids. Therefore. Columns. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. under Structural Plans. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. select Split Columns by Levels. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. click Copy. Walls. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. To select more than one grid. click the Columns tab. 14 In the Columns dialog. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. and while pressing CTRL. select Level 2. and Floors). make selections. Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. Also. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog. under Additional Copy Parameters. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar.

an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. click OK. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. To select more than one level. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. The warning can be ignored. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . click Copy. and select each level. double-click Building Elevation. After you select the grid. click OK. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. press CTRL. and that the type from the new project will be used.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. and that the type from the new project will be used. click Multiple on the Options toolbar.

After you select each level. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click Finish Mode. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. To select more than one element. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. Copy structural walls. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . The warning can be ignored. and select each element. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. click . and on the Options Bar. press CTRL. After selecting each element. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. under Structural Plans. The warning can be ignored. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. floors. 25 On the Design bar. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. click Copy. click OK. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. and that the type from the new project will be used.

Links will appear in the file they are linked into. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. click . ■ Select Overlay. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. select Bearing for Structural Usage. 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. and on the Option Bar. check the value for Structural. and click OK. click the Revit tab. and click OK. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. and floors.27 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. The linked Revit file is displayed. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. 31 In the Manage Links dialog. Click OK. click Reference Type. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. columns. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 .

160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. In the next tutorial. a new training file is supplied. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. Creating a Structural Model on page 161.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. In a later tutorial. Project Coordination on page 461.

You also learn how to splice the columns.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. After you copy columns. you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. 161 . you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. and then copy this framing to other levels.

5 Click the value in the grid head. . the imported drawing is a halftone. click structural model. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Grid. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and enter A. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. 1 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which you use as a background drawing for placing columns.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. click .

7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. Notice it is grid L. 8 When you get to grid I. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . click structural model. change the value to J.As you select subsequent grid lines. The last vertical grid is K. Zoom in and out as needed. 6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. 9 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. . Notice it is labeled B.

19 Click the column to select the arc start point. 16 On the View toolbar.11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). and draw a zoom box around the atrium. and enter 1 for the new value. Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. click . click Grid. click . The bottom grid should be grid 5. 18 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. click Modify.

21 Click the column to set the arc radius. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 .20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint.

Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. and select the grid. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.

The next exercise uses a new training file. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2.rvt. click Training Files.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Adding Structural Columns | 167 . you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns.

NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. click Structural Column.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 6 On the Options Bar. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. 4 In the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click . click Finish. and click Modelling.

Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. K5 K3. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. H1. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. H5. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. K1 G2. NOTE If necessary. 12 On the Design Bar. click Level. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". J5. J1. 15 On the left side of the elevation. B5.7 Press ESC. click ■ ■ ■ . 8 Select the columns listed below. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . J2. K2 G5. In addition. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. H2. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. Under Constraints. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. Notice the new level is named Level 3. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. 17 On the Design Bar. which are outside of the structure footprint. click Modify. there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure. and press DELETE. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 10 On the Options Bar. K4 A5. Click OK.

170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 27 In the Select Levels dialog. 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. double-click South Elevation. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 29 In the Project Browser. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. and click OK. click . 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 24 In the Filter dialog. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. select Level 3 and Level 4. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. To save changes. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. The next exercise uses a new training file. select Structural Columns. under Structural Plans. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Check None.

5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip. 3 In the Type Selector. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. Specify Girder for Usage. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select grid lines H and J. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. click Beam. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. click Finish. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. click Modify. double-click Level 2. Click Grid. 8 On the Design Bar.

16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and double-click East Section . Click OK. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 12 Select a column center.Perspective. Specify Girder for Usage. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. framing the bays with girders. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. click Modify. select Level 3 and Level 4. enter -0' 7". and click Select All Instances. 21 In the Project Browser. for z-Direction Justification. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. click ■ ■ ■ . click Beam. Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. for z-Direction Offset Value. Under Constraints. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and draw a girder from column to column. NOTE In the following image.9 On grids H and J. select Other. 15 On the Options Bar. 20 Click OK.

under Structural Plans. 5 On the Design Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Click OK. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. For Justification. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Sketch. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.rvt. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . double-click Level 2. click Beam System. 4 On the Options Bar.NOTE If necessary. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. Under Pattern. and save the exercise file with a unique name. For Beam Type. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. enter 6' 0". click Structural Beam System Properties. To save changes. you add beam systems to Level 2. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. For Spacing. select Center.

The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. click Pick Supports.8 On the Design Bar. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. click Beam Direction. 10 On the Design Bar. In the next step you edit the beam direction.

NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images.12 On the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . click Finish Sketch. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes.

176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. Under Pattern. For Beam Type. specify 2. 15 On the Design Bar. select the girder between J2 and J3. 14 When specifying the beam direction. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Number of Lines. click Finish Sketch. enter -0' 7" for Elevation.

19 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. specify 3. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . Under Pattern. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. For Beam Type. Click OK. under Structural Plans. click Beam System. double-click Level 2. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click to place the beam system. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. For Number of Lines.

Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and press TAB until the beam system highlights. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above.24 Click to place the beam system.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. select Level 3 and Level 4. Notice the copied beam systems.Perspective. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click East Sections . To save changes. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. Adding Beam Systems | 179 . 32 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 31 Click OK. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Select All Instances. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click File menu ➤ Save As.

Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Lines. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. you add a composite deck to Level 2. under Structural Plans. click Finish Sketch. Under Constraints.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. and then sketch along the girders. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor Properties. double-click Level 2. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. 5 Click OK. click Slab. 8 On the Design Bar.

14 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 and Level 4. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close. Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 . 12 In the dialog.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. double-click East Section .Perspective. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. click Modify.

4 In the Project Browser. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Brace. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Bracing on page 182. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J. select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 6 In the Type Selector. you add vertical bracing to a bay. double-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name.To save changes. click Framing Elevation. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). Adding Bracing In this exercise. double-click Elevation 1-a. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and when it highlights. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint).rvt.

Adding Bracing | 183 . 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace. NOTE If necessary.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4.

To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Shear Walls on page 184. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser.10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Structural Plans. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. double-click East Section . double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Perspective. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

specify Ground Level. Adding Shear Walls | 185 . you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP After sketching the walls. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file. 4 In the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. 6 Sketch 4 walls. select Basic Wall: Exterior .10" Concrete. For Depth. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain.

The next exercise uses a new training file. 8 Select all 4 walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click . you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click Level 2. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. under Structural Plans. 2 On the View toolbar. specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. click File menu ➤ Save As. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. under Constraints. 9 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. click Training Files. you add isolated foundations to column locations. click . TIP During selection.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. To save changes. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise.

Select Structural Columns. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". click Foundation ➤ Isolated.5 In the Filter dialog. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. NOTE In the following image. 10 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Ground Level. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. 8 In the Project Browser. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . Under Analytical Model. Under Analytical Model. 11 In the drawing area. In your training file. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. click Modify. By default. Click OK. select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. . 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. Click OK. the footing is placed at Ground Level. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.

bracing. double-click East Section . openings. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. and concrete wall framing. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems. adding horizontal framing. and save the exercise file with a unique name. foundation.Perspective.13 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. click Training Files. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. Specify Girder for Usage. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. you complete the structural model. under 3D Views. click Beam. Click Grid. click File menu ➤ Save As. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the exercises that follow. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. 6 On the Options Bar. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. ■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. 7 On the Design Bar. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. complete the framing of this bay. click Modify. Add beam chains to the following locations. click Finish. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . . Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids.NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool. click model.

■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. ■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.

20 Click to place the beam system. enter -0' 7". select Other. Under Pattern. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. click ■ ■ ■ . and click Select All Instances. Under Constraints. 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. 13 Right-click. 14 On the Options Bar. Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for z-Direction Offset Value. click Beam System. For Number of Lines. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. 17 On the Options Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click of the model. . Click OK.Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar. for z-Direction Justification. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. enter 3. select the top girder. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.

click Finish Sketch. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Under Pattern.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Click OK. 25 Using the sketch tool. click Beam System. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. enter 3. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. For Number of Lines. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. trace the outline of the bay.

Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 . 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. ignore it.27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.

29 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lastly. . The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. click model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. In this new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click Level 2. beam systems have been added to all bays. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. under Structural Plans. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser.

4 On the Options Bar. click Beam. select Other. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . for z-Direction Justification. enter -0' 7". for z-Direction Offset Value.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. Under Constraints. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.

Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 In the Type Selector. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196. The next exercise uses a new training file. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.8 Using the same method. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Beam. To save changes. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

enter -0' 2". In this training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 3 On the Design Bar. and arced. Click OK. When sketching this deck. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. sketched. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. click Slab. you can use a combination of lines including. double-click Level 2. and Foundation. Garage Level-1. picked. under Structural Plans. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click Floor Properties. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. the following new levels were added: 5.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. straight. For Height Offset from Level. 5 On the Design Bar. In addition. Roof.rvt. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. click Training Files. 7.

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes.TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. click . click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges). select Chain on the Options Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 7 Click Finish Sketch. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

click Modify. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . and on the Design Bar. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. click Modify. 60 Enter ZF.59 On the Design Bar. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click (Join Geometry). and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. 65 Select the tapered roof. 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 62 On the View toolbar. Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. click .

rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save As.66 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. double-click Level 5. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 3D . 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. using the slab shape edit tools. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. click .Atrium. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

4 On the Options Bar. click (Draw Split Lines). Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 .3 Select the atrium curved slab. and is available for modification. The edge of the curved slab highlights. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc. Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar. 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. click (Add New Points).

Notice that the shape edit points display. 14 Select the split lines. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 12 Select the curved slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . click Modify. click . 11 On the Design Bar.Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab.

double-click 3D .Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. under 3D Views. 17 On the View toolbar.Atrium. Notice that the edges of the curved slab display. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof. View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. and enter -0’ 6”. The general shape of the curved slab displays. click .

and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View toolbar. under Structural Plans. and click OK. click . under 3D Views.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . click Conform to Curve. . double-click 3D . Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. for Curved Edge Condition. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. double-click Section 3.Atrium. 22 On the Options Bar. click section view. under Slab Shape Edit. double-click Level 5. 21 Select the slab. click Project to side. under Sections (Building Sections).

click . enter SX (Snap to Point). 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select the right endpoint of the curved slab.27 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point. . and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. enter SX. 29 Click the center drainage point. click 28 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. double-click Level 5. Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser.31 On the Design Bar. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 . click . under Structural Plans. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". 32 In the Project Browser.Atrium. 35 On the Options Bar.

double-click Section 3. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. 38 On the View toolbar. 2 Select the slab. In the left pane of the Open dialog.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 40 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. click section view. under 3D Views. or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise.View. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. double-click 3D . . To save changes. under Sections (Building Sections). View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click (Edit Beam Joins). The slab is now hidden. Adding Miter Joins | 225 . select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 6 On the Options Bar. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit.3 On the View Control Bar. click . Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. 4 On the View toolbar. You can now use the Beam Join Editor.

226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.7 Click the arrow control on the first beam.

The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). 9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join. Adding Miter Joins | 227 .The miter join is complete.

11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. select Detail Level: Coarse. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Detail Level: Fine. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice the miter lock remains locked.

14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. double-click Level 4. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. or close the exercise file without saving changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file.Notice the miter lock remains locked. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. you add a curved beam to the atrium. click . Adding Curved Beams on page 229. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the View toolbar. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. and click .Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. click Beam. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

12 While pressing CTRL. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. 10 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar.The beam is placed. select the remaining curved beams. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . 9 Press ESC twice.

select Top of Beam. 16 Select the floor. under Structural Plans. click Beam System. 20 On the Options Bar.14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Maximum Spacing. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. For Elevation. Click OK. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 4.Atrium. enter 6' 0". enter 0' 0". Under Pattern. select Top. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . and on the View Control Bar. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. and for Vertical Projection. for Layout Rule. under Structural Plans. Scroll down to Analytical Model. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select 3D. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. double-click 3D . For Maximum Spacing. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 22 Select the bottom beam. For Beam Type. enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

23 Using the same method.The beam system is placed. 234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.

enter 0' 4". select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. double-click 3D . Select Use hard-points. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. under Structural Plans. For Maximum discretized offset. and on the Options Bar.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar. Adding Curved Beams | 235 .Atrium. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. select Approximate Curve. and on the View Control Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. 25 Select the beam. . click . Click OK. NOTE When hard-points are enabled. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. 28 Select the floor.

rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you then copy the opening to each level. Adding an Opening In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar. To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . Adding an Opening on page 236. and draw a zoom box around the stairway. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. under Structural Plans. double-click Ground Level. you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Select the door opening. Adding an Opening | 237 . click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown. click Door.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.

. under 3D Views. 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 While pressing SHIFT. select Level 7. 14 On the View toolbar. click stairway. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 3D View.. 9 In the Select Levels dialog. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 12 In the Project Browser. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. select Level 2. 11 Click OK.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click 3D View. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. Finally. click . under Structural Plans.rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . expand 3D Views. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you import the revised beam back into the project. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. click Training Files. Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. The next exercise uses a new training file. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening.

click Component. Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketch tools. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening. click Modify. 9 Using the sketch tool. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 On the Design Bar.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. 8 In the Type Selector. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown.

and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 0' 2". You then modify the beam by adding an opening. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Structural Plans. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. select both stiffener plates. and double-click 3D View. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . Click OK. you load the new family into the project. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. for d. 12 On the Options Bar. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241. expand 3D Views. To save changes. Finally. 15 Continue with the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click ■ ■ .Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.

13 Press ESC. and click (Circle). click located to the left of Offset. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). click Edit Family. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. click .3 Select the beam. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. click Modify. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Name. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. and double-click Front. 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. The beam is displayed in a new window. 8 On the Family Design Bar. Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. 7 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Family Design Bar. 9 In the Work Plane dialog. and draw a circle approximately as shown. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 5 In the Revit dialog. The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. under Specify a New Work Plane.

15 Select the circle. click (Align). and select the centerline of the circle. 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click . click The centerline of the circle is now visible. . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . regardless of the length. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. click (Align). 20 Press ESC. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. click Finish Sketch. 25 On the View toolbar. and the select the centerline of the circle.

rfa. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow. 27 On the View Control toolbar.26 Select the circle on the beam. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

select the beams for Levels 2 through 4.rvt located in the Imperial project file. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. click . click Load into Projects. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 .rfa. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. The project file reopens. 36 While pressing CTRL. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. 34 On the View toolbar. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. 38 Click in the drawing area. and click OK.Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 33 Enter ZF. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40.

Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. you add structural walls. or close the exercise file without saving changes.The modified beams with openings display. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In this new training file. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. 40 Continue with the next exercise. In addition.rvt.

double-click Ground Level. . For Top Offset. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Wall Centerline.12" Concrete. For Base Constraint. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter -0' 6".Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click Structural Wall. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . click ■ ■ ■ ■ . The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. select Basic Wall: Foundation . Click OK. under Structural Plans. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. select Foundation. for Location Line.

On portions of the south wall. and select Chain. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. under 3D Views. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. double-click 3D View. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click . 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible.A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline.

add a concrete column centered on each steel column location.To save changes. select Foundation for Depth. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. such as the atrium. click Structural Column. double-click Ground Level. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls.rvt. click Modify. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. double-click 3D View. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. The next exercise uses a new training file. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. and select the foundation wall chain. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Hide Element. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. under 3D Views. click Training Files. under Structural Plans. press TAB. In addition.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. under Structural Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. 10 On the View Control Bar. select 6" Concrete. double-click Ground Level.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. sloped slabs. The foundation wall is displayed. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. For Height Offset From Level. click Floor Properties. and concrete beam framing. click Slab. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. enter 0. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. click Pick Walls. The next exercise uses a new training file. 5 On the Design Bar.

click Delete Type.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. If necessary. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face. double-click 3D View. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. under 3D Views. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 . TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. 7 Click Finish Sketch. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. click Yes.

19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. 18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. click Grid. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. select the line. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. click Beam. click Modify. under Structural Plans. It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. click Finish. double-click Ground Level. 14 Select all grid lines. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. expand the warning and select the framing element. and another between G4 and G5. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 16 On the Options Bar.

Joist. under 3D Views. 29 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Filter dialog. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Structural Framing (Girder. 22 On the Options Bar.Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. click Modify. click Check None. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. Other) and Floors. double-click 3D View. and then click OK. click . NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . 27 In the Project Browser. select Garage Level -1.

click Slope Arrow. 41 In the Project Browser. 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. double-click Garage Level -1. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. enter 0' 6". and select Element Properties. For Height Offset at Tail. select Garage Level-1. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Hidden Line. and click Hidden Line. 36 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 31 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. 42 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Click OK. 34 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. under Structural Plans. For Level at Head. click Finish Sketch. select Ground Level for Level at Tail.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 0. double-click South Elevation. For Height Offset at Head. click Slab. 40 On the Design Bar.

Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. 50 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and zoom in on the ramp. click 54 On the Design Bar. 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. under Structural Views. under 3D Views. 47 On the Design Bar. Click OK. . 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. click Beam System. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . select Pick a plane. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. enter 5. select Ground Level. 48 In the Work Plane dialog. For Value. click . 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. 52 In the Project Browser. under Number of Lines. select Structural Beam System Properties. double-click 3D View. Under Pattern. 53 On the View toolbar. 45 On the View toolbar.

60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. and zoom in on the ramp. there are no drawing tools to select. 58 On the View toolbar. When you are adding a wall opening. 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . double-click 3D View. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. 57 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. click . 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp.56 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 62 Sketch the opening. click . click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. corner to corner.

65 Click File menu ➤ Close. you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. click Modify. The next exercise uses a new training file. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. and continue with the next step. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. click Unjoin Elements. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 64 Select the garage opening. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. In addition. 63 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. In this case. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

click Foundation ➤ Isolated. double-click Foundation. click Modify. and click OK. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Toe length. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. under Visibility. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". enter 1' 6". and click to select the foundation wall chain. click Foundation ➤ Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. Under Dimensions. 2 Enter ZF. For Foundation Thickness. click Edit/New. Click OK twice. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For Heel length. 7 On the Options Bar. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Structural Framing. A continuous foundation is added. enter 1' 6". enter 1' 6". click Visibility/Graphics. click Training Files. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted.rvt. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. You can save the open file if you wish. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . click Modify. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View.15 On the Design Bar. Precast Concrete on page 261. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

260 .

double-click Roof. In the first lesson. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Beam System. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. 261 . Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. under Structural Plans. click Training Files. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete.

select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". enter 0' 1". do the following: For Layout Rule. double-click 3D. under 3D Views. For Beam Type. select Clear Spacing. The beam system is displayed. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. under Pattern. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Justification. For Clear Spacing. 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .3 On the Options Bar. select Center. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 6 Click to place the beam system. Click OK.

and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 1 On the View Toolbar. click shown.rvt.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263. . Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise. double-click Section 1. click . double-click Roof. and click OK. and click Select All Instances. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. for Start and End Extension. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Construction. 2 In the Project Browser. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Right-click the selected beam.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 3 Select the beam system. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. under Structural Plans. enter 0' 5". under Sections (Building Section).

and click OK. You then import the revised beam back into the project. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. enter 0' 0". 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Construction. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson.4 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. under Sections (Building Section). Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . click . you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Clear Spacing. 6 In the Project Browser.

and double-click Left. click Edit Family. 3 In the Revit dialog. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 4 In the Family Project Browser. The beam is displayed in a new window. i_RST_Precast-in progress. 5 Select the beam. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown.

■ ■ Under Visibility. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. Click Apply. click the Annotations Categories tab. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. and then click OK. 8 In the Revit dialog. click . and click Edit. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam.

and click Modify. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 16 Press ESC. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. and click OK. click Ref Plane. for Is Reference. select Not a Reference. click . under Options. 18 On the Options Bar. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar.

25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. 24 Press ESC.22 Press ESC. under Options. for Is Reference. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. 26 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. click Dimension. click . 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". select both vertical reference planes. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. 27 On the Options Bar. select Not a Reference. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.

Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar. 34 Press ESC. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. 32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. click . and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam.

41 Press ESC. 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . 38 For the align-to point. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. select the vertical reference plane as shown. and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown.

click Lines. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line. 47 Press ESC. 45 On the Design bar.44 Press DELETE.

and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. click . 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. 51 On the View Toolbar. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 .Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).

select Override parameter values of existing types. Add dimensions to each reference plane. For Width.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. 54 In the Family Types dialog. and then click OK. Align the bottom horizontal surface. enter 10' 0". 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. click Family Types. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. Creating Drawings on page 275. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. and click Yes. The beam should adapt to all changes. enter 6' 0". Click Apply. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. If it does not. Sketch the new profile. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. 274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .

The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. elevation. usually contain a title block. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. begin by first creating sheets. section. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. which are a type of view in a project. Sheets are defined by borders. and three-dimensional (3D) views.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. and how to create new views from a model. and are accessible from the Project Browser. 3D view. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view. and section views. 275 . Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create.

Smith. For Client Name. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. Anytown. click Training Files. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. enter 2006-01. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. enter Initial Draft. enter 31 March 2006. enter J. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 Click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. right-click. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click View. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . enter Office Structure.rvt. click Sheet. 6 Click OK. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. For Project Name. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Project Number. MA 12345. click Edit for Project Address.

13 Click OK. expand Sheets (all). The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . and click to place the view. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ . 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. select Structural Plan: Level 2. click Add View. and select the title block. and click Add View to Sheet. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . click Modify. 11 When the title block highlights. enter Plans and Elevations. 9 In the Project Browser. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. 15 In the Views dialog box. enter S-1.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.

specify 1/16" = 1'. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. NOTE If necessary. and click Element Properties.17 With the view selected. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2.0" for View Scale. specify 1/16" = 1'. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Views dialog box. right-click. Under Extents. 24 With the view selected. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. and click Element Properties. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. and click OK. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click. clear Crop View. Click OK.0" for View Scale. right-click. under Graphics. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. select Elevation: South Elevation. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. click Add View. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The scale of the view on the sheet changes.

rvt. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Perspective. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 30 In the Views dialog box. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Add View. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. and click Add View to Sheet. 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select 3D View: East Section . NOTE If necessary. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 .NOTE If necessary.

The new sheet. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. add a section view. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. is displayed in the Project Browser. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. under Sheets (all). you add a new sheet to the project. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise.rvt. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and on the Options Bar. and adjust the scale of the view. under Identity Data. 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. and click OK. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 3 Select the title block. click Sheet. incrementally named S-2 Section Views. click .

click . 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag).0" for Scale. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans. 2 On the View Toolbar. click Section. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown.rvt. Create a section view of Level 2.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select 1/16" = 1'. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2.

12 Drag the title line under the elevation view.■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. NOTE If necessary. Create a callout view. double-click S-2 Section Views. right-click. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. 10 With the view selected. and click OK. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. under Sections (Building Sections). and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. click Add View. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. double click Section 1.0" for View Scale. under Graphics. select Section: Section 1. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). specify 3/16" = 1' . 8 In the Views dialog box.

under Sheets (all). as shown. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 19 In the Project Browser. specify 3/4" = 1'. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. click . under Graphics. right-click. and drag the view onto the sheet. click Callout of section 1. click Callout. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . 21 With the view selected. and position it approximately as shown. under Sections (Building Sections). 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon.0" for View Scale. and click OK.15 On the View Toolbar. double-click S-2 Section Views.

you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects.1 . you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser.TYPICAL DETAILS. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . expand Sheets (all). and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail.NOTE If necessary. click Training Files. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. and double-click S. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Detail Library on page 284. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

3 In the Save Views dialog.TYPICAL DETAILS. select Drawing Sheet: S. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Open the new folder. Enter Detail Library for the folder name. and click OK. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder.1 .

when you insert these views into a new project. select Show drafting views only. Only the drafting views will be displayed. Importing Details from the Library on page 287. Under Views. clear Drawing Sheet: S. NOTE When you save your file. Click OK. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .■ ■ Under File name. Click Save. enter Footing Section.TYPICAL DETAILS. however. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. only the 2D elements will be inserted. For File name. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Select both Footing Section views. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. ■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog.1 . navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects. 6 In the Save Views dialog.

Click OK.TYPICAL DETAILS. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . Click Open.rvt. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. close the warning dialog that appears. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Click OK. a duplicate types dialog displays. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding.rvt.1 .Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how import details from the newly created library.

and double-click S. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. expand Sheets (all).5 In the Project Browser.1 . 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . 7 In the Open dialog. Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Select the file FOOTING SECTION.rvt. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.TYPICAL DETAILS. Click Open. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION.

Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.■ Click OK. a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 289 . Click OK.

10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.rvt. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. Select the file Footing Sections.

select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. Click OK. Click OK. 11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views.■ Click Open. a duplicate types dialog appears. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project.

You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. Using Legends on page 292. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. concrete schedule. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. On construction documents. Finally.

Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 2 In the Project Browser. click Symbol. and click OK. expand Legends.rvt. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol . and click Rename. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. enter Symbol Legend for Name. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 3 Right-click Legend 1.Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 .

click Text. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . click . enter 1/8" for Text Size. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. click Duplicate. 9 On the Options bar. verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Edit/New. you create a text type with the necessary size. 8 In the Type Selector. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Under Text. enter 1/8" text for Name. On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector.

Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser.Spacer Weld Symbol . expand Sheets (all). enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. and double-click S-1 . 17 In the Project Browser. click Symbol Legend.15 Working from the top down. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 .Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. click Modify to end the command.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Text. Click OK. enter Top Bars for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. The new rebar field is added. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. select REBAR. and click View Properties. click Edit for Value. enter Bottom Bars. Under Heading. The Rebar field is renamed. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. under Fields. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Under Type of Parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Add Parameter. click OK. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule.

Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. and under Top Bars. click Group. click Edit for Value. and click View Properties. A new blank cell is created above the columns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To save changes. 34 On the Options bar. click Training Files. under the Fields parameter. For Joists B2. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. click File menu ➤ Save As. and under Top Bars. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select 2-#5C. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. 38 Proceed to the next exercise.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings.rvt. and under Top Bars. enter 2-#5 C. under Schedules/Quantities. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Bottom Bars. The schedule is updated with the joist information. and enter REBAR. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. under Bottom Bars. For Joists B3. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. under Bottom Bars. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select2-#5C. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. 35 Click the new heading. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1.

6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. Select Number for Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Volume. and press ENTER. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. Because cost is a type parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. Click Calculated Value. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type. and click Add. click OK. select Cost. 8 Under Joist B1. ■ Click OK. enter 3 for Cost. Under Available Fields. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard.

Under Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. In the Format dialog. clear Use default settings. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Currency. Under Unit Symbol. Under Field formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. Under Rounding. click Edit for Value. click OK. click Field Format. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field Formatting. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and press ENTER. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. select Total Cost. under Formatting. click Edit for Value. enter 1. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 . and click View Properties. select Calculate totals. select 2 Decimal Places. under Formatting. and click View Properties. 9 Under Joist B2.5 for Cost.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. Under Fields. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Total Cost. select $. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. Click OK. Under Units.

18 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. The next lesson uses a new training file. To save changes. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK.■ Click OK. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Other. 2 Right-click the column schedule. click . select Foundation. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. and select View Properties. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . click Edit for Hidden Levels. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. The schedule is created automatically. click OK.Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Graphical Column Schedule. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Garage Level .1. 6 On the Toolbar. and Ground Level. and zoom in on the schedule. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling .NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below. The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.

do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 3". Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. For Column Locations. select Group Similar Locations. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. for Below Bottom Level. under Horizontal Widths. and select View Properties. under Vertical Heights. and click OK. click Edit. enter 3". Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 .Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. and for Grid Appearance.

Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select View Properties. For Level text. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. To save changes. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Right-click the schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. under Graphics. 9 Right-click the schedule. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. under Text Appearance. click Edit for Value. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. click Training Files. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Courier New from the drop-down list. and select View Properties. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . under Graphical Column Schedules. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. and then select Bold. and then select Bold and Italic. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 .5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. Enter 2" for Level Names. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. under Identity Data. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 7 Click OK.

and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. 17 On the Options bar. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. click . Click Apply. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . and clear Leader. 18 In the Filter dialog.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. 11 On the Options bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. clear Structural Columns. click Vertical. select Vertical. Click OK. select Structural Column Tags. Under Orientation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.

click .19 On the Toolbar. and zoom in on one of the column tags. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. and select View Properties. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. . Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . click 20 On the Toolbar.

3 In the Project Browser. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. Under Sheet Number. click ■ ■ ■ . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1/4" = 1' . click Training Files. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. Under Column Locations per Segment. 5 On the Options bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 Click OK. enter S-3.0". The next exercise uses a new training file. and select the titleblock. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . ■ ■ Under View Scale. expand Sheets (all). or close the exercise file without saving changes. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter 10. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. To save changes.rvt. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Steel Column Schedule. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. do the following. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. Click OK.

13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 8 In the Views dialog. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. click Modify. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. and select the titleblock. and click to place the view. click Add View. and on the Options Bar. under Extents. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . expand Sheets (all). enter S-4. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. Under Sheet Number. 10 Select the schedule. and click OK. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. click OK. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. Click OK. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. click . select Graphical Column Schedule. and double-click Sheet S-4. select Steel Column Schedule. 15 On the Options bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. click Sheet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 14 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Project Browser. and click Next. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Database. 6 Click Finish. and click to place the view. under Graphical Column Schedule.19 On the Project Browser. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. To save changes. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click OK to create the database. 9 Under Directories. click Create. enter Revit_Project. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click the File Data Source tab. The next exercise uses a new training file. under Database Name.rvt. under Graphical Column Schedule. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 8 In the New Database dialog. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. select a location for the database file. expand Sheets (all).mdb. and drag it onto the sheet. and double-click Sheet S-6. and click to place the view. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. expand Sheets (all). click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click OK. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. and click to place the view. 10 When the confirmation message displays. and click Next. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 On the Project Browser. 26 On the Project Browser. under Graphical Column Schedule. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 3 Click New. and drag it onto the sheet. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. and drag it onto the sheet. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.

and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. click File menu ➤ Save As. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. The next tutorial uses a new training file. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example. Steel Details on page 329.

328 .

and add these views to a sheet. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. revise an existing elevation view. expand Views (all).rvt. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail).Steel Details 9 In this tutorial. 2 Select . revise a callout view. Structural Plans. Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. click Training Files. This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 4. You cut a section in plan. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. 329 . and open Imperial\i_RST_DET.

8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0". and select 3/4" =1' .3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. click Section. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. 4 In the elevation view. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 7 Select . select the elevation crop view. double-click Level 4. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible. under Structural Plans. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Select . A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. and select 1/2" =1' . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . click Modify. double-click West Elevation.9 Draw a section as shown. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. 12 Select the section crop view. under Elevations (Building Elevation).0". 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible.

25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. enter Steel Details for Name. 30 In the Views dialog.Steel Details. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. Create a sheet and place the section. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 27 In the Views dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and click Add View to Sheet. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. right-click S-6 . and select 3/4" =1' . 29 In the Project Browser. select Section: Section 1. 20 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. and click to place the view.Steel Details. 24 In the Views dialog. right-click S-6 . and click to place the view. and click Add View.Steel Details.0". and click to place the view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click OK. and click Rename. expand Sheets (all). 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed. and click Add View. and click OK. and click Add View. elevation. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click S-6 . 23 In the Project Browser.

You will sketch the lines in a model view. 2 On the Toolbar. i_RST_DET-in progress. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . Detailing Steel In this lesson. and a facade support detail to the model. click braces meet at Level 4. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress.rvt. a bolted angle detail. double click Elevation 1-a. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. . Detailing Steel on page 333. you add a welded bracing detail. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser.

334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. TIP After establishing the line direction.3 Select the left brace. click Detail Lines. 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. enter the value. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and select Copy. 13 On the Options Bar. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. 10 Click to place this line. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. click . enter 2' 6" for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. 14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown.Next. click Detail Lines. click Offset. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the detail line. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . 8 On the Options Bar. select Numerical.

and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .15 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. click Modify. and select the horizontal detail line. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown.

24 On the Options Bar. and click to place it. and enter a period. and enter 3/8. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. 23 On the Design Bar. and select the weld symbol. 21 Select the weld symbol. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 .18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. click Modify. 20 Click Modify. click the left top weld annotation. drag it into the view as shown. Repeat for the left bottom value. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. Repeat for the right bottom value. click Add a Leader. and press DELETE to delete this element. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser.

Under Graphics. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol. select Weld All Around. Click OK.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. and click Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Right-click the new weld symbol.

36 Proceed to the next exercise. Then you add some annotations. click Text. and enter 3/8" PL for text.rvt. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . 1 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Options Bar. TYPICAL for text as shown. i_RST_DET-in progress. 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. click Text. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . under Sections. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . double-click Section 1. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. In the first part of the exercise.

under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details .2 In the Project Browser. click Text. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select L4x4x5/16. click . Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown. 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown.

rvt. you add members to support exterior wall glazing. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). In this exercise.8 Enter the text notes as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. i_RST_DET-in progress. double-click West Elevation. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. 2 On the Toolbar. click Level 4 at Grid 4. .

click . You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and select the left side of the column as shown. 6 Click Modify and select the channel. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Edit toolbar. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. 7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. and click to place it. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall.7.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. select C5x6. move it to the position shown.

10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. select the back of the channel as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 .9 Next.

17 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. a new training file is supplied. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. click Text. select the bolt. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. In the next lesson.11 In the Project Browser. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344. under Sheets.7. You can save the open file if you wish. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. A325 BOLT. 16 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Side: 14K3. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. 11 On the Design bar. 5 In the Type Selector.Deck Span Transition. Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2" = 1' . click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. Click OK. click Drafting View. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Detail . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Detail Component.0". 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. click Modify. select K-Series Bar Joist . Under Scale. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Section: W18x35.rvt. 9 In the Type Selector. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes .Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Detail Component. click Training Files. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. and double-click Typical Detail . 2 In the New Drafting dialog. expand Drafting Views. 7 On the Design bar.Deck Span Transition. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 .

select Detail Component. select Detail Component. select Repeating Detail. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Modify. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Selector.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 14 Click the end of the joist. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. 17 On the Design bar. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown.125.5 WR 22. select AISC Tube Shapes . 21 On the Design bar. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 19 In the Type Selector.

28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. 31 On the Design Bar. select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3. 32 Select the weld symbol. and select Symbol Right. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Field Weld. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. Click OK. drag it into the view as shown. Under Other. 27 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 29 On the Design bar. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. click Modify. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.25 On the Design bar. select Detail Component. click Modify. and click to place it. and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . and on the Options Bar. clear Symbol Left. Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom.

click . 35 On the Options Bar.34 On the Design Bar. click Text. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 40 On the Design bar. click Modify. and select the weld symbol. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. click Add a Leader. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. click Text.

43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . 44 Proceed to the next tutorial. and navigate to a folder location of your choice.

350 .

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project. 351 . Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. you model reinforcement in a concrete beam.

click .rvt. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click Beam Detail. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Toolbar. click Training Files. positioned to the right of the drawing area. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Detail Views (Detail). Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

6 Hover over the section view. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #4. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . scroll down the list of available shapes. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. For training purposes. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. and select Rebar Shape: S3.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file.

9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. enter 0’ 6”. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Maximum Spacing. 13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. approximately as shown. click Modify. scroll down the list of available shapes. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select Rebar Shape: 01. and select Rebar Shape: 01. and select Rebar Shape: T9. 10 On the Design Bar. For Spacing. click Modify. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular.

approximately as shown. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. select Rebar Bar: #6. enter 4. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 .18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. For Quantity. click Modify. For Layout. 19 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. select Fixed Number. and on the Options Bar.

26 In the Element Properties dialog. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click OK. click Edit for View Visibility States. 28 On the View Control Bar. select both View unobscured and View as solid. click . 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 3D. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser. click OK. for 3D View. under 3D Views.23 On the Options Bar. click . 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. under Graphics. 30 On the Toolbar. select Detail Level: Fine.

Notice that the rebar sets are visible. and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 . Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. . click 32 Select the rebar as shown.

Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 35 Proceed to the next exercise.33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. To save changes. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file.

and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. click Training Files. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click .Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. under Detail Views (Detail). positioned to the right of the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. double-click Column Detail. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. 2 On the Toolbar.

select Maximum Spacing. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . scroll down the list of available shapes. click Modify. Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. and select Rebar Shape: T1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. select Rebar Bar: #4. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. 6 Hover over the section view. For training purposes. enter 0’ 3”. select Rebar Bar: #4. and on the Options Bar. For Layout. For Spacing. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. 8 On the Design Bar.

as shown. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . select Fixed Number. 17 On the Edit toolbar. enter 3.10 On the Design Bar. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. For Layout. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. 15 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. select Rebar Bar: #8. 12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. and select Rebar Shape: 00. 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. click (Copy). click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and on the Options Bar. Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. scroll down the list of available shapes. For Quantity.

Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown.

22 On the Options Bar. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. click . 27 On the View Control Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Detail Level: Fine. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select both View unobscured and View as solid. 29 On the Toolbar. for 3D View. and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . click OK. double-click 3D. and click OK. under Graphics. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click Edit for View Visibility States. under 3D Views.

rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files.

select the crop view. click . and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes.0" for Scale. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 6 On the View Control Bar. select 3/4" = 1' . 2 On the Toolbar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click Section. double-click Garage Level-1. under Structural Plans.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the section view.

under 3D Views.Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. 9 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click 3D.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 .10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. click Lines. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below.

The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline. click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 3. click Major Direction Edge.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. adjacent to the major bars. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). 13 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. To change the major direction. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown.

The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .

Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. and click OK. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 16 On the Options Bar. under Layers. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction.

Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. select Fixed Number. enter 30. enter 30. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Value. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. enter 30. For Interior Minor Number of Lines. under Layers. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. under Construction. and click OK. For Interior Major Number of Lines.

click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Design Bar. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. and click Zoom to Fit. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Using the drag control. 20 On the Design Bar. Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. change all Bar Types to #4. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. click Modify.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. and click OK. under Layers.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Garage Level-1. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 2 On the Toolbar. To save changes. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. or close the exercise file without saving changes.rvt. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. For Model Graphics Style. 7 In the section view. For Detail Level. click Section. select the crop view. select Shading w/Edges. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .0". select 1/4" = 1' . 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. 6 On the View Control Bar.

11 Using the line tool. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. under Structural Plans. to enter sketch mode. click .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Garage Level -1.

under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Project Browser.12 On the Design Bar. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . double-click Section 4. click Finish Sketch.

and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. change all Bar Types to #4.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. clear Top Major Direction. click . select Attached End. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. under Layers. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. 22 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. under Layers. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. click . 23 Select the rebar tag. 24 Using the drag control. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 19 On the Design Bar. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Select the slab opening. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 3. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf. click Training Files. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click . Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. 2 On the Toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. You are now in sketch mode. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement.5 On the Options Bar. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. 8 On the Design Bar. click . click Modify. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 . and enter 1' 0" for Offset.

10 On the Options Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Primary Bar . select 1/4" = 1' . select #4. For Detail Level. select Fine. click Modify. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. click Create a section view . under Layers. 17 In the section view. select Shading w/Edges. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown.Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 16 On the View Control Bar.0". click Section. 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . For Model Graphics Style. select the crop view. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

move the rebar tag approximately as shown. 25 Using the drag control. 24 Select the rebar tag. click Modify. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . . and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. 23 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. select Free End. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. click 19 Select the rebar. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. click Tag ➤ By Category.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. double-click Ground Level. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under Structural Plans. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. draw a pick box. To save changes. 2 On the Toolbar. and position the upper drag bar as shown. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click structure. .26 Click File menu ➤ Close. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line.

The Section 1 view opens. Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. click .4 Press ESC. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . 5 Double-click the section bubble. and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown.

7 On the Toolbar. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. select Boundary between faces. select Chain. 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click (Line). 8 On the Options Bar.NOTE For training purposes. 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. click (Draw). 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch 3 lines as shown. click (Edit Cut Profile).

21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. click Sketch. click Finish Sketch. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 Press ESC. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element.

This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. under Construction. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps. for Hook At Start. 26 Click OK. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. select Standard . and click Element Properties.90 deg. 23 On the Sketch tab. 22 Press ESC.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch.

31 Select the end of the straight bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. 30 In the Type Selector. select Rebar Bar: #8. (Mirror). and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar. click wall. Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown.Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar.

Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 33 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. For Spacing. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. enter 4".Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. select Minimum Clear Spacing. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. 37 Select the rebar set. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement. 36 On the Options Bar.

Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. click Modify. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 .39 On the Design Bar. click 42 Select the footing. (Pick Elements). 41 On the Options Bar. click (Edit Rebar Cover).

do the following: Click Add. (Pick Faces). 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. For Setting. Click OK. enter 0' 2".43 On the Options Bar. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. For Description. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). 47 Select the face of the structural wall. enter Exposed/Cast against Earth. . click 46 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. do the following: Under Description. click ■ ■ . Click OK. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. select Exposed/Cast against Earth. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown.48 On the Options Bar. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 .

Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. To save changes. 53 Click to select this plane. or close the exercise file without saving changes.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. The next exercise uses a new training file.

and position the drag bar as shown. under Structural Plans.1. double-click Garage Level . click structure. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click Training Files. draw a pick box. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. 6 Click the section line. click Modify. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. . 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. 2 On the Toolbar. click Section.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor down.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise.

0". 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and select 3/4" = 1'. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 9 In the section view. select the crop view. The Section 2 view opens.7 Press ESC. 8 Double-click the section bubble.

Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. do the following: ■ For Layout. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. 12 In the Type Selector.NOTE For training purposes. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. as shown. select Maximum Spacing. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. select Rebar Bar : #7.

enter 1' 6". 22 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown.1. 19 Select the rebar set. draw a zoom box. click . and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. 20 On the Design Bar. and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level .■ For Spacing. click (Mirror).

Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area.24 Click to place the rebar. 28 On the Options Bar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 . click Sketch. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. 26 On the Toolbar. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . and click Zoom to Fit.

Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. 36 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 32 Click to place the rebar. click .You are now in sketch mode. 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level .1. 33 Press ESC. click Finish Sketch. 34 On the Design Bar.

Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.38 Click to place the rebar. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 .

400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown.

44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. 43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. under Graphics.41 On the Options Bar. select View unobscured and View as solid. click OK. click . under 3D Views. for 3D View. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 . click Edit for View Visibility States. double-click 3D. 45 In the Project Browser.

Notice the rebar is visible. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. For Spacing. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. select Maximum Spacing. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. To save changes. and on the Options Bar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. enter 1' 6". click . click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 49 Click File menu ➤ Close.47 On the Toolbar. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. click Dimension. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. select it. and ordinate. and double-click Floor. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. The dimension types include aligned. In Revit Structure. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. radial.rvt. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. 403 . you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. Dimensioning In this lesson. 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. angular. linear. By default. baseline. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. multi-segmented. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building.

6 Move the cursor to the left.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. select it. toward the empty space outside the wall. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension.

11 Select the dimension. indicating that the dimension can be modified. 13 On the Options Bar.The dimension displays in the drawing. click Modify. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. 10 On the Toolbar. select Wall faces for Prefer. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. 7 Click the lock. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. The lock displays as locked. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. 15 On the Options Bar. click the lock to unlock it. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. and press DELETE. (Undo). click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 405 . and click to set the dimension location.

an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 19 On the Options Bar. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. In addition. and click to place the dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. click Dimension.

■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . and select Wall faces for Prefer. click Modify. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. Select the inside face of the wall. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. the default dimension option. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. and place the dimension as shown. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). and press DELETE. click for Prefer. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. click Dimension. as shown.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ .

33 On the Design Bar. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. and OK. for Dimension String Type. 37 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. click . click . and click to place the dimension. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. select Baseline. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click OK. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. Click Apply. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. click Dimension. . 34 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Modify. Move your cursor to the right.

click OK. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. for Dimension String Type. click . Creating Dimensions | 409 . 43 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Click Apply. and OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1). 45 In the Type Properties dialog. . Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. 41 On the Design Bar. select Ordinate. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics.

I.rvt. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. (See Architectural Drawing). 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . to each additional element (grids 2 through 5). 48 In the Dimension Text dialog.D.A. +/. Click Apply and OK.M. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. and enter S.F. click Replace with Text.Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1). do the following: ■ ■ For Below. enter V. under Text Fields. Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify.A. 51 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value.6" Click Apply and OK. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

11 Place the dimension as shown. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. and press TAB repeatedly. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. and select the exterior face. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. in some cases. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. but do not select anything. a different wall selection choice highlights. Each time you press TAB. including the wall centerline. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. click Dimension. and select the exterior face. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. For example. delete. select it. and select it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. However. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building. for a multi-segmented dimension. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. you learn to add.rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. When you place dimensions.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise.

and control boxes display on each witness line.Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. click Modify. The dimension highlights. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

The witness line moves to interior wall face. 17 Right-click the control box. The witness line is deleted. 15 Click the control box again.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . but do not select it. and click Delete Witness Line.

22 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. click . 2 On the Options Bar. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. click Edit/New. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Edit Witness Lines. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.rvt. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 20 To end the editing command. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . If you right-click the control box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click Modify. a context menu with different options is displayed. The full dimension string is displayed. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise.

In the next exercise.4 In the Type Properties dialog. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. select Right.rvt. when sketching walls. 6 On the Design Bar. a new training file is provided. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. not the direction it is read. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close. then Up for Read Convention. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. For example. a lock symbol immediately displays. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. As you create components. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. 5 Click OK twice. click Training Files. if 2 or more walls are colinear. click Modify. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Text. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. You can save the open file if you wish. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. The dimension updates as shown.

Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. The symbol changes to a closed lock. click (Align). the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. 3 Click the lock. 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. select Multiple Alignment. 6 Select the short wall to the left. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. When you align 2 components. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. 5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. indicating that the Align command is active.

but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked).7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. click (Undo) once to undo the move. 11 On the Toolbar. 12 Click the right wall. and drag it downward. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . 9 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. click (Align). Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan.Move the walls to verify the alignment. clear Multiple Alignment.

Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . 20 Click the lock to unlock it. as shown. and align the windows. on the Design Bar. indicating the constraint. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 19 To view the constraint. 21 On the Toolbar. 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. A lock is displayed. click Modify. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. click .The 2 windows align. 22 Align the remaining windows.

You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt. 1 View the south wall. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt.23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. and notice that it includes 5 openings. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.

select Entire Walls. a new training file is provided. the windows). 6 Select the south wall. click (Create Aligned Dimensions). These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. For Pick. click Dimension. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. The 2 vertical walls highlight. For Prefer. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click to add the dimension. 8 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click Options. You can save the open file if you wish. Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Openings and Widths. 5 Click OK. In the next exercise. click Modify.2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise.

2 On the Options Bar. click . 5 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the left. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. 4 In the Type Selector. Click to create the second leader point. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. select Leader. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. and double-click New Roof. expand Structural Plans. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Relative Base. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown. click Training Files. select Current Level. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. Click to place the spot dimension.

■ On the Design Bar. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 9 In the Type Selector. Click to create the second leader point. click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click to place the spot dimension. and for Relative Base. select Leader. 10 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right. select Current Level. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. click Modify. . 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 .

click Modify. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Foundation. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). click . 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. and Current Level for Relative Base. Click to create the second leader point. expand Structural Plans. Move the cursor up and to the right. select Leader. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing.■ On the Design Bar. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. click Modify. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. ■ Click OK. do the following: Under Text. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. 19 On the Options Bar. ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter TOF=. click ■ . Click to create the third leader point. for Single/Upper Value Prefix.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. For Text Location. select In-line with Leader. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under Text. 29 On the View Control Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and double-click South Elevation. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Detail Level. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. click Edit/New. click . click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. select Medium. Click Apply. and then OK.

35 In the Type Properties dialog. For Text Location. Move the cursor to the right. click Edit/New. 33 On the Options Bar. On the Design Bar. select In-line with Leader. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. Click to create the second leader point. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. and then OK. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. under Text.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. For Elevation Indicator. Click Apply. click Modify. click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Click to place the spot coordinate. enter EL. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . click . click Modify.

Tagging Beams In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Annotating on page 428. You can save the open file if you wish. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view. Annotating In this lesson. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Level 2. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. click Training Files.rvt. In the next lesson. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam Annotations. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . a new training file is provided. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. and click OK. do the following: ■ Under Placement. select All selected beams in current plan view. Click OK. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. NOTE For training purposes. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. for Horizontal End Offset. enter 1". 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . In the Placement Settings dialog. select All beams in current plan view. Click Settings. click Beam Annotations. 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog. 5 On the Design Bar.

■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog. click the Level beams in plan tab. click OK.Live. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. under Select Element to Place. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.0 kip for End Reaction . select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams. ■ Under Annotation location and type. click Structural Framing Tag. under Analysis Results. enter 10. click . and click OK. Click . Under Structural Framing Tag.

11 Right-click the open area above the model. and on the Options Bar. click Apply. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. . Tagging Beams | 431 . . under Type Mark. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. under Type Mark. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. enter W14. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. click Apply. enter W18. and on the Options Bar. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. and then OK. click Modify. and then OK. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit).

by Type Mark for File name. click OK. click Yes. select the W14X22 beam tag. while pressing CTRL. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. You are now in the Family Editor. 28 On the Family Design Bar. 22 Click the structural label. under Category Parameters. for Value. click Edit. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. select the active file. and on the Options Bar. select Structural Framing Tag .by Type Mark: Standard. 27 In the Save As dialog. Enter Structural Framing Tag . and. select Type Mark.20 In the Element Properties dialog. click parameter(s) to a label). click the W18X40 beam tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. click . click Edit Family. and on the Options bar. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Load into Projects. and click OK. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Label. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Click Save. 31 In the Type Selector. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing.

and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. click ■ ■ (Filter). 34 In the Filter dialog. Tagging Beams | 433 . Select Structural Framing Tags. 33 On the Options bar. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.32 Enter ZF.

or close the exercise file without saving your changes. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. select Structural Framing Tag . 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.by Type Mark: Standard. 35 In the Type Selector. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown.■ Click OK. 36 To save your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. In the next exercise a new training file is provided. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You are now in the Family Editor. click Yes. and on the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click the structural label. click Training Files. click Edit Label. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. 40 Click File ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit Family. click Beam System Tag.NOTE For training purposes. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags. expand Structural Plans. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. and double-click Level 2.

Select parameter 2. Under Visibility. under Graphics. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Vertical Align. for Sample Value. enter S1. Select parameter 3. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). click . for Sample Value. for Prefix. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. enter W14X22. and for Suffix. (Add parameter). for Spaces. select Top. enter ] (close bracket). select Number of studs. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. enter ) (right parenthesis). for Sample Value. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. select 3. enter [ (open bracket). ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. and for Suffix. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. and click OK. enter ( (left parenthesis). enter C=1/2". do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. select Camber Size. Under Category Parameters. and select Break. for Prefix. click OK. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Reference Planes.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. . 8 On the Options Bar.

■ Click OK. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. In the Reload Family dialog. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. 15 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. and click Yes. 12 Select the text on the beam label. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Override parameter values of existing types. expand Structural Plans. 14 Click Modify. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. click Load into Project.

Worksets on page 439. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. do the following: Under Structural. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. ■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As.18 Click one of the W18x40 beams. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. click ■ .

In Revit Structure 2009. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Using Worksharing. beams. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. In this tutorial.Worksets 12 On many building projects. click Training Files. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. In the next exercise. slabs. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.) is called a workset. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project. etc. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. 439 . this collection of building elements (such as roofs. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. however. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.rvt.

7 In the New Workset dialog. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. a small number of team members are working on the structural model. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. Only User-Created worksets should display. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. under Show. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. one team member is assigned to the slabs. and Views. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. click New. Therefore. For training purposes. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. and notice all are editable by you. The Worksets dialog is displayed. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. clear Families. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. imagine 5 users including yourself. Project Standards. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Beams and Columns. 3 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. 5 Under Show. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . a second user is assigned the roof. In this simple training project. a third is assigned all beams and columns.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.

Click OK. click New. Click OK. Click OK. enter Elevator Shafts. enter Foundation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. 10 In the Worksets dialog. 11 In the New Workset dialog.■ Click OK. click New. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. click New. 8 In the Worksets dialog. enter Slabs. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . 13 In the New Workset dialog. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. 9 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view.

15 In the New Workset dialog. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Click OK. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. click New. enter Roof. Clear Visible by default in all views. click New. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. this improves performance. The roof should only be visible in specific views. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. Again. this improves performance. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. 19 In the New Workset dialog.14 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK. click New. 17 In the New Workset dialog. Clear Visible by default in all views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Again. enter Garage Ramp. Click OK.

22 In the Save As dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. enter Worksets Project . If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 23 Click Save. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Non Editable. 27 On the right side of the dialog. under Show. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Now that you have created the central file. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. The next step is to create the central file. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 25 In the Worksets dialog.Central. for file name. 20 In the Worksets dialog. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.

enter Initial Central File Setup. 28 In the Worksets dialog.Central on the network drive. and click Open. 30 In the Save to Central dialog. 31 After the file is saved. notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Assigning Worksets on page 445. under Comments. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Select the file. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets .In the Worksets dialog. navigate to a folder on your local computer. and click OK. click File menu ➤ Close. 35 In the Save As dialog. click OK. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name.

3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. notice that all worksets are available for editing. you enabled Worksharing on a project. You then created the central file.In this exercise. for Workset. 4 On the Options Bar. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. 2 Click Cancel. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and created a local file. Assigning Worksets | 445 . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click . In the Worksets dialog. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. checked in all worksets. select Beams and Columns. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 6 Click OK. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

9 Click Cancel. click Check None. Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 13 Select Structural Columns. under Borrowers for Workset1. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click . and click OK. 12 In the Filter dialog. notice that User1 is listed.The Worksets dialog. 11 On the Options Bar.

14 Right-click one of the columns. for Workset. Assigning Worksets | 447 . but the columns remain highlighted. and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. and click Make Elements Editable. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. click . select Beams and Columns.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Options Bar.

17 Click OK. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1. under After save relinguish editable. and click OK. 2 Click Open. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . clear Borrowed Elements. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. to save the local file. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and select Floors. 5 Click OK. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. click . 7 On the Options Bar. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog.In the Worksets dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. select Workset1. 4 In the Worksets dialog. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements.

10 On the Options Bar. select Slabs. for Workset. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets .9 Click OK. click . 12 Click OK. All floors are highlighted.

foundation. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. click . 16 Click OK. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. select Roof. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 14 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 18 Enter VV.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. and the garage ramp. click the Worksets tab. for Workset.

20 Clear Beams and Columns. 23 Check Beams and Columns. clear the box next to the desired element. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. The elements are now visible in the view. To turn off additional elements. click the Worksets tab. 452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Roof. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and Slabs. Roof. and then click Apply and OK. 22 Enter VV. and Slabs. and then click Apply and OK. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view.

and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. For training purposes. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. each user must check out worksets. make elements editable. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. User 2: Create a local file. under User name. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network.rvt. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. instructions are staggered. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 28 Click OK. This is a system setting.25 In the Save to Central dialog. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. 4 Click the General Tab and. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. two users access the central file through a network connection. 3 On the Settings menu. return to the Settings dialog. In the following section of this exercise. please do so before continuing. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. Throughout the process. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. If you have not yet completed these exercises. one user has already created a local file. and reset the User name to your computer login name. skip the following section. consider that person to be User 1. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. specifically sequenced. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. and reload the latest changes. For training purposes. and click OK. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and proceed to Create a local copy. 27 Under Comment. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Options. enter User 2.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 22 Click OK. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Yes for Editable. under Open Worksets. You now have a local copy of the project.7 In the Open dialog. open it now. modify the structural model. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. You are now the owner of that workset. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. and double-click 3D-Atrium. 15 Select the Foundation workset. expand 3D Views. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. 11 In the Save As dialog. it becomes the active workset. and click Save. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. If you only have one workset checked out. select Specify. User 1: Check out worksets. 16 Click OK. 23 In the Project Browser. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. select the central file and. click Options. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and move it. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. 8 Click Open. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. In addition. If it is not open. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This file is for your use only.

expand 3D Views. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it. 28 Click OK. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . and double-click 3D-Atrium. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select a footing. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central.

click the Worksets tab. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 34 Select Roof. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. select Yes for Editable. You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof. Click Yes. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 37 In the Design Bar. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. double-click Roof. select Roof to turn on its visibility. This is because when the Roof workset was created. and click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Pick Supports. However. 38 On the Design Bar. click Slab. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click Modify. 35 On the Project Browser. and click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Structural Plans. Therefore. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Even though the Roof workset is active. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. 39 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics.

they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and click Open. leave this file open in its current state. you save the training file as a central file. you need to set up your central and local files. There are specific instructions for each user. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. This exercise requires two users and. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457. As each of you work. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. throughout this training. Check out worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Each user checked out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. Each user must have network access to the central file. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In this exercise. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. 2 In the Worksets dialog. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 44 Click OK. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . two users are working on the same project with separate local files. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. In subsequent steps. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. and these problems are rectified.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. select them. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file.

select Foundation. and select Yes for Editable. 7 Under Active Workset. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. expand 3D Views. select Beams and Columns. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. select the Beams and Columns workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and double-click 3D-Atrium. and click OK. 11 Move the footing. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. At this point. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select a footing.3 Select the Foundation workset. After you submit the request. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. 6 In the Worksets dialog. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Active Workset. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 9 On the Options Bar. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and click OK.

and click OK. and notice the footing is in the new location. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . 20 In the Save to Central dialog. to Local. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 16 Click Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. you requested permission to edit the element. Project Coordination on page 461. select the following. 15 Click Grant. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 18 Click OK. In this multi-user exercise. click Check Now. and the other user granted it. select the request submitted by User 2.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. In this case.

460 .

walls. Finally. floors. depending on the impact to the design. levels. or postponed. you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. Finally. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. a warning is displayed. rejected. 461 . and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. Coordination Review In this lesson. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. reviews each change individually. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. which can be accepted. and columns for any future modifications. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. Once each change has been reviewed. Starting a New Project on page 149. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the tutorial. Click OK to open the file. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started. and the copy monitor feature was activated. click Training Files. In this tutorial. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature.

and click OK. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . double-click Level 3. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. and then click OK. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. click . under Structural Plans. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. 8 On the View Toolbar. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Apply.rvt. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.1 In the Project Browser. select the Revit Links tab. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. Click . 7 Enter ZF. 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Graphics. select Coordination for Discipline. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

10 On the Toolbar. click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . and click Wireframe. 13 On the Options Bar. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. Click to select the linked file. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select .9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. . and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft. click the Model Graphics Style control. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. click as shown. On the View Control Bar.

These messages identify elements that were deleted. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. Reject. Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. select the remaining messages. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. Actions include: Postpone. and click Show. moved. Accept Difference. and click Apply. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches. and then click Show. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. or changed in some way from the architect’s file. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. press SHIFT. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . In the Action column.

Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog. select Modify Grid B. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. Click the message i_RBD_After. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. click . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . and click Apply. and click Show. do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. ■ For Action.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change.

For Action. press SHIFT. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. and click Apply. expand Maintain wall position. and select the remaining messages.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls.

and OK. In the Edit Comment dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Select Postpone for Action. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic .The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Select Postpone for Action. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . Click the Add Comment field. In the Coordination Review dialog. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. Click OK. Click the Add Comment field. enter Need to discuss with architect.8" Masonry. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog.12" Concrete. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible.rvt. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress. enter Need to discuss with architect. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . click Apply.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. i_RST_Coordination-in progress. Interference Check on page 468.24 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog. The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. The default table compares elements within the same project. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . select i_RBD_After.rvt for Categories from. Interference Check In this exercise.

Interference Check | 469 . Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. select Structural Columns.

4 Click OK. do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 5 In the Interference Report dialog. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project.

rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread. select a folder location on your local computer. and that it interferes with the stairway. Click Save. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. select Revit Interference Report (*. Each representing a different level. Interference Check | 471 . Under File name. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. Under Save as type. enter Columns vs. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Click Export to generate an interference report. Stair Check. ■ Select i_RBD_After.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway.html).

select i_RBD_After. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project.7 In the Interference Report dialog. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. 9 In the Interference Check dialog.rvt for Categories from. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 11 Click OK. and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway. click Close.

12 In the Interference Report dialog. Under Save as type. select Revit Interference Report (*. Select i_RBD_After. Door opening. Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. also the brace interferes with the opening. select a folder location on your local computer. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Under File name. enter Brace vs. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report.rvt: Doors: Door Single.html). Interference Check | 473 . Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows.

yet as concise as possible. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. 2 In the Revisions dialog. For example. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 4 Click on the value for Description. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . In general.rvt. click Close. click Revisions. When Issued is selected. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In the next lesson. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. a new training file is provided. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If you select By Project. if the active revision is number 1. You can create a sequence of revisions. and enter 2/15/06. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.■ Click Save. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you use this option. the revision is locked and issued to the field. This is the date the revisions were identified. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next lesson.

click near grid line B. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. and OK. under Sheets (all). allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 4 In the drawing area. However. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode.1 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. and select Activate View. including revision number and revision date. click Revision Cloud. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Apply. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.If Visible is not selected. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. double-click S. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet.Level 3 Framing Plan. In most instances.

When Issued is selected. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. and enter 2/20/06. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. click Add: New. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . click Finish Sketch. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. In general.7 On the Design Bar. In this tutorial. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog.rvt. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. yet as concise as possible. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Revisions. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revision is locked and issued to the field. NOTE At this point. i_RST_Revision-in progress. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. 4 Click on the value for Description.

If Visible is not selected. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. click Finish Sketch. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Add: New. and enter 2/21/06. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . 11 On the Design Bar. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 14 Click on the value for Description. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click above the elevator shaft. 8 In the drawing area. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. In most instances. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. and enter Research brace. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.

In general. yet as concise as possible. In most instances. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 16 Verify that Visible is selected. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. double-click S. under Sheets (all). allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field.Stair Shafts Sections. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.2 . any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. If Visible is not selected. When Issued is selected. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 20 In the drawing area. and select Activate View. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. click above the brace.

26 Click on the value for Description. the revision is locked and issued to the field. click Add: New. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. yet as concise as possible. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . 25 Click on the value for Release Date. click Finish Sketch. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter 2/22/06. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog.23 On the Design Bar. and enter Research door. 28 Verify that Visible is selected. When Issued is selected. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu.

In most instances. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 35 On the Design Bar.If Visible is not selected. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. double-click S. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.Stair Shafts Sections. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.2 . The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all). 32 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu.rvt. i_RST_Revision-in progress. click above the door. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. and select Activate View. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. click Revision Cloud. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.

The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and lock it from further changes. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all). and then issue the revisions to create a record. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. the cloud is tagged as number 1. clear Leader. Working with Revisions on page 481.rvt.Level 3 Framing Plan. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the tag. and because the revision is the first in the project. 5 In the drawing area. i_RST_Revision-in progress. and select Activate View. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions | 481 . 9 Proceed to the next exercise.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by sheet. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. double-click S.1 . Working with Revisions In this exercise.

and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. double-click S. and click OK.2 . You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). double-click S. under Sheets (all). 4 Select . NOTE After you issue a revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. you can no longer modify it. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. you prevent further changes to the revision. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . You do this by issuing the revision.Stair Shafts Sections. click Revisions.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select .Level 3 Framing Plan. 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. 3 In the Project Browser. On the Settings menu.1 .

8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Working with Revisions | 483 . Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485.

484 .

component properties. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. loads and load combinations. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. 485 . Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. you can apply that same template to a 3D view. if you save a template from a plan view. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. When working with the analytical model.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view. To update a view. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. Views and View Templates are not linked. Detail level. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. the template is still applied to the 3D view. quantity take off. material properties. For example. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. geometry. you can reapply the modified template. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. The analytical model consists of structural components. Discipline. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. The physical model that is used for documentation. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. As you create objects and the physical model. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views.

The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Training Files. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly.rvt.Analytical Checks In this exercise. you learn how to check member supports. 2 In the Select View Template dialog.

Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Analytical Checks | 487 . to view each warning. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. or isolated). This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. wall. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 4 In the Warning dialog click . 5 Close the Warning dialog. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view.

488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show.

Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show.The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. Analytical Checks | 489 . Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.

10 In the Warning dialog. D-2. D-4. double-click Level 2. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and H-4. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. under Structural Plans. E-3. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. 14 On the Design bar. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. H-3. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. click Close. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click Ground Level.

Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. 3 In the Warning dialog. 4 Close the Warning dialog. and double-click 3D. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. click to view each warning. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . expand 3D Views.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check.

click . 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. and on the Options Bar.■ ■ Click Show. In the Element Properties dialog. click Close. under Analytical Model. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 7 In the Warning dialog.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). click OK. 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. Analytical Checks | 493 . 12 Press CTRL.

for Top Vertical Projection. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . you edit and add load cases. In the next exercise. The Warning dialog does not appear. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. Load Cases on page 494. 14 Under Analytical Model. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. click . You can save the open file if you wish. click OK. select Top of Column.13 On the Options Bar. a new training file is provided. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close.

you learn how to add new load cases. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. The selected load case is copied in the table. edit.rvt. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Revit Structure provides a default number. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 2 Click Add. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. In this exercise. select the Load Cases tab. or delete load cases. 3 Click Add. In this table. select Dead Loads. 5 Under Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. you add or delete load natures. then click Duplicate. The second table is the Load Natures table. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. In this table. Select an existing load case record in the table. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. and rename it to Roof Hung. click Training Files.The first table is the Load Cases table. Load Cases | 495 . you add. Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table.

expand Views (all). and enter an appropriate name. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. A host for a load has its own work plane. you will be adding dead loads.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. and loads can be placed by default. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. and wind loads to the model. and double-click View 1 . using the project coordinate system. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . i_RST_SAM3-in progress.Analytical. Hosts include slabs and beams. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand 3D Views.rvt. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. live loads. In this exercise. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496.

3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. . 4 Select .2 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 8 On the Options Bar. Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click Loads. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click Hidden Line. under Analytical Model. 5 On the Options Bar. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 . and click OK. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Area Load). 9 Click the garage sloped slab.

select Project for Orient to. click (Area Load). click 13 Click OK. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. 11 Select the load. expand Structural Plans. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . expand Views (all). and on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. under Structural Analysis. click Loads. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . 10 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

and click Element Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. click Loads. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 .0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. under Structural Plans. and click OK. enter -0. select Area Load: Area Load 1. double-click Level 2-Analytical.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

13 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. click Modify. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. and click Element Properties. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. as shown. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. click (Line Load). TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. enter Wind Load.11 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.

draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. and click Hidden Line. 18 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. 21 Select . expand Views (all).Analytical. 20 In the Project Browser.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. and double-click View 1 . expand 3D Views. double-click Level 2 . click the Model Graphics Style control.Analytical in order to view the added loads. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . and click OK. 19 On the View Control Bar.

502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. click Grid.22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

26 On the Design bar. 27 Select the temporary grid. 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble. 25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. click Framing Elevation. The elevation view opens. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. and press DELETE. and will be deleted in a later step. click Modify. Adding Loads to the Model | 503 .This grid is drawn for reference only. 29 Select .

select Workplane for Orient to. and click OK. click (Line Load). 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 34 Select the load. click .30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Loads. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. and on the Options Bar. 32 On Level 2. as shown. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. under Structural Analysis. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing.

rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. select LL1. 9 Under Factor.6. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 8 Click Add. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.rvt. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. enter DL+LL. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Add. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. 4 Under Name. click the Load Combinations tab. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 10 Under Case or Combination. select DL1. enter 1. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.4. Load Combination | 505 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 Under Factor. Load Combination on page 505. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor. 7 Under Case or Combination. click Structural Settings. enter 1. Load Combination In this exercise.

14 Under Factor. 17 Under Factor. 15 Under Case or Combination.3. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and click Add. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. select Ultimate. select Envelope.2. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. select DL1. enter 1. and enter 1. and click Add. enter 0. enter DL+LL+WIND. select LL1. 23 Select Row 2. 12 Under Name. 24 Under Type. 18 Under Case or Combination. select WIND1. 25 Under State.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table.5. 21 Under Case or Combination. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. 20 Under Factor. 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Scroll down the list of items. Transfer Project Standards | 507 .26 In the Structural Settings dialog. you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. click OK. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog. and select Load Types. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. select the file that contains the load table.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. Click Check None.

click Overwrite. click the Load Combinations tab.■ Click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog.

i_RST_SAM3-in progress. you document the analysis by adding an annotation. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Structural Plans. and double-click Level 2 Analytical.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.The load combinations are displayed. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. expand Views (all). and creating an analytical schedule.

510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.

8 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Fx 1 and click Add. under Category. right-click on the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. 11 Using the same process. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 . 10 Under Available fields. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields.Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Line Loads and click OK.

14 Click File menu ➤ Save. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F .3. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. In addition.Analytical. under Structural Plans.13 Click OK. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. double-click Ground Level . For this reason.

and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 . 4 Press TAB. 5 Press TAB.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.

■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. In the next exercise. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. For example. a new training file is provided. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project.

Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members. the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 .

Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. 3 Click OK. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. click Training Files. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Analytical Model Settings tab.

click . click as shown. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. 4 On the Toolbar. 2 On the Toolbar. 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. .Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 .

and on the Option Bar. 8 Click the slab. under Analytical Model. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model.The dot located at the top of the beam. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the beam. for Vertical Projection. select Auto-detect. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. click . NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. select Top of Slab. and then click OK. for Vertical Projection. and on the Option Bar. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click . For demo purposes. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click Zoom in Region. and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. The dot located at the top of the slab.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab.Analytical. click . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 . represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown. 11 On the Toolbar. double-click Level 2 . Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. right-click.

and on the Option Bar. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. and then select the column. select Auto-detect. 18 On the Toolbar. click . and then click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Tools toolbar. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. select the wall. click (Join Geometry). The horizontal projection plane for the column. click . The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .14 Click the column. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

21 Press TAB.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. click . and then click OK. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. under Analytical Model. for Horizontal Projection. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. select Auto-detect. 22 On the Option Bar. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . click . right-click. for Horizontal Projection. select Plane 1. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. 26 Click the upper wall. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model. and click Zoom in Region. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown.

and click Zoom in Region. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section).The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. double-click Section 3. right-click. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.

for Top Vertical Projection. click . Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. 31 Click the lower wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . select Auto-detect. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. click . and then click OK. under Analytical Model. under Analytical Model. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Option Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam. for Vertical Projection. select Bottom of Slab. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall.

click No. click . select Exterior Face.The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). and on the Option Bar. for Horizontal Projection. In the Revit dialog. 42 Click the lower wall. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. and then click Open View. 40 On the Design Bar. 36 In the Go to View dialog. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. click . You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. under Analytical Model. for Analytical Slab Edge. and then click OK. double-click Section 3. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Finish Sketch. under Analytical Model.Analytical. 38 On the Option Bar. 35 Click the slab. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click . select Auto-detect.

and then click OK. and on the Option Bar. 46 Click the lower wall. under Analytical Model. and then click OK. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 . select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. click . select Top of Wall. under Analytical Model. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click .The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Vertical Projection. and on the Option Bar.

double-click Level 3. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. 49 Enter ZF. click . 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 52 On the Toolbar.Analytical. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). double-click Level 3 . Close any additional open windows.

54 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the beam shape handle. for Horizontal Projection. and then click OK. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views. under Analytical Model. select Auto-Detect.53 Click the beam. Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. Press TAB. Extend each end of the beam as shown. and on the Option Bar. . 55 In the Level 3 window. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam.

Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. a new training file is provided. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. Boundary Conditions on page 531. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can save the open file if you wish.

5 In an empty part of the drawing area. and click Zoom in Region. click Training Files. under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. click Apply. clear Structural Foundation. and click Zoom in Region. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Boundary Conditions. 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. and then click OK. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. 8 On the Options Bar.rvt. 2 Enter ZF. select Fixed. double-click View 1 . right-click. and for State. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. click (Point Boundary Condition). you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. right-click. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. Boundary Conditions | 531 . 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns.Analytical. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Boundary Conditions In this exercise.

click . under Structural Analysis. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 14 On the Option Bar. and select the other symbol. select Pinned. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. and then click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. for State. press CTRL.

and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. select Pinned. 20 On the Options Bar. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. click . 18 On the Toolbar. click (Line Boundary Condition). click Boundary Conditions.Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. and for State. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Boundary Conditions | 533 .

a new training file is provided. via an Application Programming Interface (API). In addition. and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model.22 Click File menu ➤ Close. sections. For more information. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. In the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. The application programming interface (API) starts. member relocation. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . or member addition. that you confirm in the analysis software. are imported back into Revit Structure. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. All views. You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. including structural plans. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. elevations. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial.

elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.). or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. etc. sheet. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. or schedule into AutoCAD. Revit Structure. expand 3D Views. click Training Files. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. section. You can export a 2D view (plan.Atrium. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers. Finally. and double-click 3D . In this tutorial. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. 535 . you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007.

select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options.dwg). select a folder on your local computer. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only).2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. ■ ■ Click Options. 4 In the Export Options dialog. click Short. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. 3 In the Export dialog. Under File naming. Under Save as type. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . The existing file name is automatically shortened. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in.

■ ■ Under Prefer. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . 8 Navigate to the file location. 5 On the Export dialog. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. Click OK. click Save.

the Revit Structure model appears as shown. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. 11 In Revit Structure. Revit Structure columns.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select a beam as shown. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. beams.

click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2.Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Export dialog. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. i_RST_Export-in progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. Under File naming.rvt. Click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 . select a folder on your local computer. and double-click Level 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Under Save as type.dwg). expand Structural Plans. Under File name.

When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007.rvt. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. and click Open. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open. On the View’s export mode dialog. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 6 Navigate to the file location. 8 In Revit Structure.If the view was set to wireframe. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. a warning dialog appears. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. click Hidden Line Removal. i_RST_Export-in progress.

3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. Select each sheet. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. select a folder on your local computer. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file. Under Export Range. and click OK. click Save. clear Views.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. 4 On the Export dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. 2 In the Export dialog. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. Exporting Sheets | 541 .

542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .If the view was set to wireframe. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. a warning dialog appears. navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. If you wish to save the changes. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. On the View’s export mode dialog. and click Open. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Hidden Line Removal. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.

Exporting Sheets | 543 .When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture. they appear as shown.

544 .

because there is only one file to track. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Using the Family Editor. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . In addition. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. exceptions to this rule. and when and how to use it. For example.rfa extension. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. thus the term family. however. each with a different size. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Walls. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. The different file types become much easier to manage. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. In this lesson. Even though various types within a family can look different. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. and roofs are examples of these types of families. they are still related and come from a single source. 545 . You also learn about the Family Editor.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. such as a curved beam. There are. shape. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. material set. In this tutorial.

and beam. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . has wall types that define interior. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. Standalone families include columns. while many more are stored in component libraries. floors. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. and roofs. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. The basic walls system family. for example. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. exterior.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. but you cannot create new system families. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. generic. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. and partition wall styles. foundation.

custom step footing. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. You create in-place families only within the current project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. Introduction to Families | 547 .rfa extension. and also a standalone pile cap family component. for example. transfer them from one project to another. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and save them from a project file to your library if needed.

To add a family to your project. Load Family command on the File menu. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. you can drag it into the document window. how to access it. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. and when to use it. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. it is saved with the project. or 3D. In the final exercise. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. In this section. if you change the original family. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. elevation.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. you learn about the Family Editor. However. In this exercise. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as plan. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . After the family has been loaded in the project. how to access it. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects.

How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. and click Open. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. such as newsgroups. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. it will be available within the Type Selector. 9 Save the newly defined family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 5 Finally. If you find a close match. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. and then load it into the project. select the appropriate template. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. modify it as needed. it opens within the Family Editor. if you have exhausted your external resources. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. Within the Windows® environment. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you will need a specific component for your design. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 3 Next. With Revit Structure open. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. open it in the Family Editor. you can click File ➤ Open. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. To start a new family. presume it is a bay window that you require.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. When the family opens. and click Open. navigate to a family file. Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . you can double-click any file with an . 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. In this case. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.

550 .

Creating Custom Families In this lesson. 551 . When you create an in-place family. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. a custom castellated beam.rft) template for use in other projects. and an in-place family for a step-footing. In the second exercise. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. you create it within the project file. a custom titleblock. In the first exercise.rft file). Using the installed templates. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. not within the Family template (. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. you create a custom. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family.

and click Zoom to Fit. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.rfa. right-click. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and then click OK. Click Apply. and press DELETE. 6 On the View Control Bar. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown.

10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor inside the profile. click Dimension. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions).Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. Click the angle. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 . 12 On the Design Bar.

554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and press ENTER. and click Zoom to Fit. enter 66. right-click. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. and drag them approximately as shown. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale.13 Select the angled reference plane. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions. 16 On the View Control Bar. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area.

Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. click Dimension. and add a dimension as shown.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . and press DELETE.

and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. for Is Reference. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. select Not a Reference. click Dimension. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. under Other. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. click . 24 Press ESC. click Ref Plane. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar.

Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane.The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane. 31 Select the dimension line. and press ENTER. and enter 0' 11/32". click the dimension. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. 29 Press ESC. 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown.

click Lines. and click Delete Inner Segment. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 39 Press ESC. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar. 36 Click Modify. 38 Using the split tool. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

enter a for Name. under Parameter Data. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. and then click OK. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . enter b for Name. click Label ➤ Add Parameter. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog.41 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. 44 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data.

48 Select the dimension as shown. for a. enter 0' 2". and OK.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. do the following. and select wr. enter 0' 4 1/2". for wr. ■ Under Other. 47 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. click Label. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Family Types. 51 In the Family Types dialog. 49 On the Options Bar. select 2" X 6". 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types.

enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail.rfa. 62 In the New Project dialog. 57 In the Family Types dialog. under Structural Plans. and then click OK. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. do the following. 58 Click File ➤ Save. for b. 63 In the Project Browser. in the Imperial Templates folder. and click Open. click Finish Sketch. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . 52 On the Toolbar. enter 0' 2". The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. for Sr. Click Apply. select Rename. Under Family Types. enter 0' 2 1/2". 60 In the New Project dialog. for a. Click Apply. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. for b. click (Rectangle). 66 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and enter 2" x 5". click the Imperial Library folder. select Structural Analysis-Default. 65 On the Design Bar. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Under Other. click OK.■ ■ Under Other. click Slab. double-click Level 2. Under Other. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and for File Name. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. Under Other. click Family Types. 68 On the Design Bar. click Browse. enter 0' 2 1/2". and click Save. enter 0' 5". You are now in sketch mode. 64 On the Design Bar. click Lines.rte.

73 On the View Control toolbar. For Detail Level. and in the Type Selector.The slab is created. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. 71 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Sections). For Model Graphic Style. select 1" = 1' 0". select Fine. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. select Wireframe. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Section 1. click Section. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. 72 Select the slab.

Under Layers. double-click Section 1. The new profile is applied to the slab. 82 In the Project Browser. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. If there are multiple files open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The file should still be open. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. select Layer 3. under Construction. do the following. Under Structural Deck Properties. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. select Edit for Structure. click Training Files. select the slab project from the available files. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam. ■ ■ ■ . click OK. open the file from the saved folder location. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. 75 On the Families Design Bar. click Load into Project.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. Click OK. for Deck profile. under Sections.rvt. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. 76 Select the slab. If it is not. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . and open the new family file. select the new metal deck profile file.

■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. dt1 = Tee depth top beam. click castellated beam. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . e2 = Space between voids (web post length). . . Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. b = Length of sloped portion.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown. click Edit/New. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

For dt2. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. For b. enter 0' 5 1/2". click OK. enter 0' 3". Click Apply. enter 0' 6". do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. enter 0' 3". enter 0' 4". Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For dt1.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. click Rebar Lines. click Training Files. under Construction. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. and then click OK.rft. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. For e2. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565.

■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop.4 On the Options Bar. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click ■ (Draw). ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar.

■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown.

Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select B. 9 Press ESC. for Label. 568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 On the Options Bar. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown.

15 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select D. for Label. for Label. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 .13 On the Options Bar. select C.

18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown.rte. 26 In the New Project dialog. select B. 22 In the Save As dialog. for Label. and click Save. 24 In the New Project dialog. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .17 On the Options Bar. for File name. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. select C. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. 19 On the Options Bar. in the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. click Browse. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. select Structural Analysis-Default. click OK. for Label. enter Square.

double-click Level 2. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. click Slab. and select Rebar Shape: Square. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . select the new project. and be certain that the Square. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. under Structural Plans. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host.rfa file is open. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. open the file from the saved folder location. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. 34 On the Families Design Bar. The active rebar shape is highlighted. click Finish Sketch. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. click Lines. 32 On the Design Bar. If it is not. Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes.27 In the Project Browser. You are now in Sketch mode. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. The slab is created. click (Rectangle). click Load into Projects. The file should still be open.

42 Click ESC. for Placement Plane.38 On the Options Bar. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. select Rebar Bar: #10. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 In the Type Selector. 44 Select the rebar. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. 41 Click to place the rebar. select Detail Level: Fine. select Near Cover Reference. 40 Hover over the section view.

47 Proceed to the next lesson. 46 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. Creating In-Place Families | 573 . you start with an incomplete foundation wall.rft) template. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear. click Modify. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category.

rvt. click Training Files. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click .36" x 12". click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. click Foundation ➤ Wall.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. 4 Click the foundation wall.

12 Press TAB. and click OK. select Structural Foundations. 10 On the Design Bar. Make sure the entire footing is selected.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 In the Name dialog. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . 8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. select Pick a plane. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. click Create. and select the bearing footing as shown. and click OK. 11 In the Work Plane dialog.

and then click OK. enter -3' 0". 15 On the Options Bar. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the value for Material. 16 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. select Concrete . for Name.Cast-in-Place Concrete. 24 On the Options Bar. and select Multiple. 22 On the Family Design Bar.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar. for Depth. Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only. click OK. under Materials and Finishes. click . 21 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Family. click Modify. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. sketch a solid extrusion as shown. 19 In the Materials dialog. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown.

26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 . 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.

32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. click (Join Geometry).28 Press ESC. and click Multiple Join. 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click (Join Geometry). 36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. click Modify. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. and click Multiple Join.

40 In the Project Browser. 580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC.38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. click 3D Views ➤ 3D.

Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. select D . The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 4 On the Options Bar. and your project data. 2 In the New dialog. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.36 x 24.rft. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. and labels. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. click . you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template. text. and enter -1/2" for Offset. and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. click Lines. graphics. The titleblock has linework.

11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. . and click . click .Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 8 On the Options Bar. click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line.

select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 18 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 26 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. click . 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 22 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line.13 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. enter 3/4" for Offset. click Modify. select Wide Lines. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. select Title Blocks. click Lines. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. while pressing CTRL. NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector.

click . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Text. you add a company logo. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. select Company Logo. click Edit/New. under Text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise.jpg. text notes. 9 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. 2 In the Open dialog. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 3/8" for Text Size. navigate to Training/Common. and labels to your titleblock. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown. and select Bold. 11 Click OK twice.

18 Select the drag handle. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. and drag the text note down as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and select the last text note. and add an address and phone number as shown. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. click Modify. select Text: Text Note 1.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . in the text box. 17 On the Design Bar. and click outside of the text box to complete the text.

25 Click inside the Consultant text group. address. select Constrain and Multiple. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click . 23 On the Edit toolbar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Text. 24 On the Options Bar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and select the consultant text note. Add consultant name. click Modify. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar.

31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 34 Click OK twice. 30 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Move the cursor down 4''. enter 3/16" for Name. click . and enter Sheet Number. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Name dialog. click Text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . select Text: 3/16". Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. and click to specify the second copied text note location. under Text. enter 3/16" for Text Size. 29 On the Options Bar. 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the first copied text note position. click Duplicate.

select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. and enter Drawn By:. and click OK.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and enter Checked By:. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. select Project Issue Date. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. click Label. and enter Date. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 43 In the Select Parameter dialog.

48 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. click . 50 On the Options Bar. select Drawn By. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click to specify the label location. enter 3/8" for Text Size. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 55 Click OK twice. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. enter 3/8" Label for Name.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Label. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. select Checked By. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. 53 In the Name dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 59 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. select Label: 3/8'' Label. select Project Number. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Sheet Number. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click OK. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Center and Middle. and click OK.

70 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. so that they are all aligned. click Left and Middle. 73 Click OK twice. select Client Name. 78 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Duplicate. enter 1/16" for Text Size. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. select Project Name. and click OK. click . enter 1/16" Label. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click to specify the label location. select File Path. under Text. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. Click Modify. click Label. click Modify. click Edit/New. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. 75 On the Options Bar.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. select 1/16” Label. 71 In the Name dialog. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location. 68 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . and select any labels that may need to be moved.

you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Sheet. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Name for Drawn By.rfa. click Load. 5 In the Open dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click .79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. and click Open. The titleblock graphics.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. and labels are now complete. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.rfa file. select it. and select the titleblock. 7 Click OK. under Other. select Training D-Size Titleblock. verify that default. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. text. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. and then click OK.

enter Jane Smith. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. enter January 1. 2005. For Project Number. enter Office Building. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For Client Name. enter 2005-01. 14 Click OK. enter In Progress. For Project Name.12 On the Settings menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Project Information. For Project Status. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 .

594 .

The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. 595 . you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. and web members. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool.rvt. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. double-click Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. To use the Truss tool.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. bottom chord. under Structural Plans. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 6' 0". Click OK. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 9 On the View toolbar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 4 In the Type Selector. click ■ ■ ■ . click Truss. click . for Truss Height. Under Dimensions.2 On the View toolbar. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. do the following: Under Structural. 7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. 5 On the Options Bar. select Top. for Bearing Chord. 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span.

Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span. delete the extra flange at column location A1. 11 Press DELETE.The truss is placed between the columns. 12 Using the same method. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown.

under Structural Plans. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. double-click Roof. select Multiple. 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 16 On the Options bar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. 15 On the View toolbar. click (Copy).

click .18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. double-click Roof. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. 21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). 25 On the View toolbar. 20 On the View toolbar. select the remaining trusses. click (Copy). Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . under Structural Plans. click Modify.

26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. click 29 Enter ZF. 28 On the View toolbar. and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. click Modify. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Design Bar. click Truss. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. . 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

enter 6' 0". Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Dimensions. for Truss Height. 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. do the following: Under Structural. select Top. for Bearing Chord. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.32 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown.

D4. 37 Using the same method. add trusses between columns C1. . 38 On the View toolbar.C4. and D1.36 Enter ZF. click 39 Enter ZF. 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 . click shown .Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. You can save the open file if you wish. Click OK. and repeat for the remaining trusses. click Edit/New. and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters.500. click Truss. 6 In the Name dialog. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. enter Howe Flat Truss . 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned.rvt. click . do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. for Structural Framing Type.Short Span. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Bottom Chords. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Type Selector. for Angle. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. 44 Using the same method.500. a new training file is supplied. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 90. for Structural Framing Type. 3 On the Options Bar. Under Diagonal Webs.42 Press DELETE.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. The truss changes to the new type. click OK. change the remaining short trusses to the new type. 11 In the Type Selector.Short Span. draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. . 10 On the View toolbar. Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . click 14 Enter ZF. double-click 3D. 12 Using the same method. click select the truss as shown. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web. . under 3D Views. 13 On the View toolbar.

select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. Click OK. click Edit/New. for Structural Framing Type. Under Diagonal Webs.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click select the truss as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate.500. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . enter Howe Flat Truss . . 16 In the Type Selector. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. click Truss. click . for Structural Framing Type.500. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 20 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click 3D.Roof Span. 24 On the View toolbar.

27 On the View toolbar.Roof Span. 26 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 .NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange. click 28 Enter ZF. . select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . The truss changes to the new type. 25 In the Type Selector. change the remaining long trusses to the new type.

Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. and then select the truss as shown. under 3D Views. Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape.rvt. click . click Training Files. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .29 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click 3D. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new training file is supplied. 2 On the View toolbar.

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the roof as shown. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . All instances of the truss will be highlighted.

11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. a new training file is supplied. 8 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the View toolbar. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 10 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Design bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. In the next exercise. vertical webs. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile.The top chords. click . View the custom truss 7 Select the roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. You can save the open file if you wish.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family.rft located in the Imperial folder. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. click the Training Files icon. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. click Training Files. Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Dimension.

8 Using the same method. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar.7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. click Truss Top Chord.

click Truss Web. 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. Truss Bottom Chord.11 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 .

enter Custom_Truss. 17 On the Design Bar. Click OK. You are now in the project file. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family.rvt. For File name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. select Family Files (rfa).16 Using the same method. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. 19 In the Save As dialog. click Load into Projects. and click OK. navigate to a folder of your choice. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. For Save as type.

under 3D Views.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. double-click Level 2. 23 On the Design Bar. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. click Truss. 27 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. select Custom_Truss.

30 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. click OK. You can save the open file if you wish. click Grid. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool. double-click Level 2. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. Finally. and a framing elevation. you add braces to form the steel truss. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. under Structural Plans. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. 2 In the New Project dialog. create column grids. select Structural Analysis-Default.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Choose Template dialog.rte. and click Open. a new training file is supplied. in the Imperial Templates folder. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In the next exercise. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown .a. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and place approximately as shown. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Structural Column. 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. click Ref Plane. double-click Elevation 1 . click Framing Elevation. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 5' 0". Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 .) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown. and press ENTER. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Selector. 17 Click the dimension. 9 Select each grid line.

18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown. click Ref Plane. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. and enter 15' 0". 19 Click the dimension. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. 22 Press ESC.

29 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. click Beam. 27 Enter 7 for array count. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 . 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 26 Drag the array to the right. and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. The array is complete.24 On the Tools toolbar. click . Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar.

select 3D Snapping. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. click Brace. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown.30 On the Tools toolbar. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. When placing beams. click truss as shown. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. 33 In the Type Selector. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. When placing braces. .

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . then select the edge of the top chord as shown. 39 Select the vertical ref plane. 38 On the Tools toolbar. click . and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown. 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace.36 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane.

double-click 3D. View the truss 41 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .

43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.The completed truss is displayed. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 42 Click File menu ➤ Save.

624 .

you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In addition. 625 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the design process. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. and each option set can have multiple schemes. In this tutorial. Using design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options.

After you create a design option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. TIP In this exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you design each of the structural options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each is constructed for interchangeability.In this particular case. you can edit it. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The client has asked you to create various options. click Training Files. 2 In the Design Options dialog. In the second exercise. make your final design decision. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click New. under Option Set. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. the only available command is to create a new option set. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. and delete the unwanted options from the project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. each with multiple design options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. With the second option. In the final exercise of this lesson. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set.rvt. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. In the first exercise in this lesson. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . therefore. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you set up multiple design option sets. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. the roof and structure systems must work together. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project.

In this case. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and the third column centered between the two. 5 On the View menu. and click Close. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. TIP To center the middle column. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 7 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. expand Floor Plans. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.3 Select Option 1 (primary). The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Column. expand Views (all). 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. select: ■ ■ ■ . In the following illustration. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. add three columns. 4 In the Project Browser. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click Modify. By selecting Multiple. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . click Edit Selected. click 12 On the Options Bar. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 9 On the Design Bar. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.

A copy of the three selected columns is added.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and. click . they are difficult to see in this view.

The first click specifies the beam start point.Notice the 12 columns that you added. double-click TOP OF CORE. select Round Bar : 2". and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. In it. and click at its center to set the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. Next. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom in on the upper right column. click Modify. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. you add the beams that span the columns. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Beam. under Floor Plans.

and click the center point. click 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. 30 On the View toolbar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. and click OK. under Option. under Option. click New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 37 Select Option 2 and. 45 Under Roofing. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. under Option Set. under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . 43 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. 40 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click New. name the option Louvers. 41 Under Option Set. enter Brackets for New. under Option Set. 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Design Options dialog. not a new option set. enter Beam for New. enter Structure for New. click New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. enter Roofing for New.

47 Under Roofing. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. double-click ROOF TERRACE. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Under Now Editing. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. select Beam. 52 Click Close. you create the second design option. When finished. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. name the option Sunscreen. select Option 2. and click OK. under Structure. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 53 In the Project Browser. it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. click Rename. 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 51 Under Edit. under Floor Plans.

select Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the plane that is moved.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. click Align. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 58 On the Tools menu. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 .

60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.

68 In the Design Options dialog. 70 On the File menu. 69 Click Close. and click Save. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog. i_Urban_House-in progress. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 66 On the View toolbar. which is visible by default. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state. name the file. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click Save As. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Finish Editing. 67 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 .rvt. click .Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

delete them after the rafter is in place. 4 Under Edit. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 10 Referring to the following illustration. a Louver system. do so now. With the second option. click Component. The first option. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Edit Selected. the other for beams. under Roofing. 8 In the Type Selector. each with multiple design options to pick from. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. Under Now Editing. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span.rvt. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. expand Floor Plans. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. If you need to add dimensions. you design each of the roofing options.In this exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Sunscreen. In the next exercise. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. you set up multiple design option sets. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 5 Click Close. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Tools menu. select Rafter 2 x 10. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 6 In the Project Browser. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. select Louvers (primary). You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. open it now. expand Views (all). Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. The second roofing system.

Enter 5 for Number. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 13 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. click Modify. and click OK. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. Select 2nd for Move To. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Array. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 .

For example. you can enter 3 3. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. The space separates feet and inches. and press ENTER. enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays. rather than entering 3' 3".18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. TIP When entering a dimension value.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Edit menu. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. click Component. click Modify. and press Enter. and select the louver you just placed. when the listening dimension displays. 20 In the Type Selector. 25 With the louver still selected.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . and. select Louver 2 x 6. and click Array. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 23 On the Options Bar. Enter 34 for Number. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. enter 1’. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar.

30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The louver roof system is complete. click Finish Editing.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 29 On the View toolbar. under Edit. click .

NOTE As you sketch the arcs. then you can modify it through the dimension. and click OK. and the third point defines the arc. 34 In the Project Browser. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. under Roofing. the top of the next column on the right. click Properties. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 39 On the Design Bar. 33 Under Editing. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. expand Elevations. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. select Sunscreen. 43 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . 41 Select the top of the left column. 40 On the Options Bar. Click OK. You will fix this in a later step. and then click Close. click Lines. click . and double-click West. click Edit Selected. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. In this case. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Therefore.

47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 48 On the Design Bar. a Louver system. 50 On the Tools menu. Under Constraints. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. Select the right arc. In this exercise. 52 On the File menu. then the center arc. The first option. click Finish Editing. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. The louver roof system is complete. and then click Close. click Trim/Extend. click Save. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The second roofing system. 45 Click OK. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. you designed each of the roofing options. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. 49 On the View toolbar. The roof sketch must be a continuous line.44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. under Edit. Sunscreen. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 46 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click .

After exploring the combinations. under Views (all). you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and last options. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. secondary. right-click {3D}. 5 Right-click each of the copies. expand 3D Views. and click Rename. under 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Duplicate.Managing Design Options In this exercise. under 3D Views. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Primary Option. 10 In the Project Browser. make it part of the building model. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. tertiary. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 2 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 7 On the View menu. do so now. under Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. 11 On the View menu. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. double-click Secondary Option. enter Primary Option. you select a design. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Managing Design Options | 643 . click the Design Options tab. click the Design Options tab.

20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Views (all). 15 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. double-click Last Option. 19 On the View menu.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. and click OK. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all).

The set is deleted. 22 On the Tools menu. 25 Select Structure. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. under Structure. 33 In the Design Options dialog.At this point. click Close. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 29 Select Roofing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 30 Under Option Set. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the beam option becomes part of the model. select Make Primary. since you no longer need them. 26 Under Option Set. Managing Design Options | 645 . the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Accept Primary. click Delete. 24 Under Option. This was the client choice for structural. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. In your design options. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. An alert is displayed. double-click Primary Option. select Beam. 27 In the alert dialog. Because the client has selected the design option. click Yes. In this case. 31 In the alert dialog.

you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. made it part of the building model. and deleted the discarded design options. click Save. 35 On the File menu. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you selected a design. After exploring the combinations. In this exercise.

modify their visibility. performance. In this tutorial. Comparison of alternatives on a site. 647 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. You position the building models on the site plan.

you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Linking Building Models In this lesson. and the other is a townhouse. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You position the building models on the site. You link two building models to the project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . One building model is a condominium. modify their visibility. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.

however. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.rvt. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. you can do so.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. RELATED See the lesson. click Training Files. This option is grayed out. 8 Clear Read-only. with write permission. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. and open Common\c_Site. 2 On the File menu. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. c_Condo_Complex. NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. Auto . Select c_Site. ■ ■ Manual . click Save As. right-click. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. this system is not exposed to the user. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. click Open. Manual . Otherwise. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . and save the file there. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 5 On the File menu. and click Properties. this option will place the link at a predefined location. c_Townhouse. click Open. 4 On the File menu. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. in the Model Linking folder that you created. select the three files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. click Close. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click OK. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.■ Auto . 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. All three files now reside.

Notice the blue detail lines. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Origin to Origin.■ Click Open. expand Views (all). click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans. select Auto . For Positioning. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 11 On the File menu. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.

click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 16 For the move start point. The Move command requires two clicks. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . The linked model moves as one object. After you select it. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The first click specifies the move start point. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. After you specify the location to move to. The second click specifies the move endpoint.

21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. select Auto . For Positioning.Origin to Origin.18 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. To rotate an object. you first specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click (Rotate). when the vertical line displays. click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . and click to specify the end of the rotation.23 On the Edit toolbar.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

click (Copy). The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 . and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

32 On the Edit menu. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . use the Move command to make any adjustments. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 34 On the Options Bar. click Rotate.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. click . under Identity data. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. enter Townhouse A. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. for Name. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click and hold Orbit. do so before continuing. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. you need this project file open and in this view. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. When you originally linked the files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. If you have not completed the previous exercise. In this exercise. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click (SteeringWheels). they were placed too low within the site topography. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. After linking the files. 2 On the SteeringWheels.38 On the File menu. In the next exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . click Save.

the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and double-click South. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the steps that follow. and then select the plane that you want to align. under Views (all). 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you first select the plane you want to align to. When using the Align command. expand Elevations. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and click OK. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. when it highlights. click (Align). Click the Revit Links tab. and click to select the line. 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. To do this. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. In this case. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.rvt. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task.

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

14 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. select Family and Type for Sort by. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 13 On the File menu. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Close. You have completed this tutorial. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Save. and then click OK twice. 12 Select Grand totals. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and click Properties. right-click Door Schedule. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. clear Itemize every instance. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Click OK. under Other. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type.

676 .

you work with a building information model that requires renovation. Using Phasing In this lesson. beams. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. complete with schedules. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 21 In any project. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. the galleria. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. and create plan views for each phase. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. ■ ■ 677 . assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions. You create new phases. footings. In this tutorial. a floor slab. You create and manage 3 project phases. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. braces and footings) to phases. as well as a covered walkway. For the client. and then add new building model elements. You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. demolish existing construction.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. you create new phase-specific views. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. Phasing Your Model | 679 .Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. After you assign building elements to phases. You create new phases for the project timeline. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work.

This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 5 Select any of the exterior walls. and double-click Floor. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. By default. or temporary) are visible in this phase. As you add new elements to the building model. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. and the Phase Demolished value is None. demo. then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. existing. the current phase linework is displayed as black. click . The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. For example. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. When you create a new structural project. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. click Training Files. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Click Cancel. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. expand Views (all). Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing.

Phase 1 (south). The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. on the Project Phases tab. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify to clear the command. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). With the phase Filter set to Show New. and Phase 2 (north). The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. 10 In the Phasing dialog. existing earlier phases. All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project. click the New Construction field. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and double-click 3D. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. Phasing Your Model | 681 . 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. 12 Under Insert. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. is visible in this view. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. demo. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. click After. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. expand 3D Views.7 Click Cancel.

right-click one of the rectangular footings. 21 On the View Control Bar. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and click Hide Object. and click Select All Instances. click Hide/Isolate.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 20 In the drawing area.

and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 32 Click OK. click . under Phasing. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Show All for Phase Filter. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. select Existing for Phase Created. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. as shown. click . and click OK. walls. 26 On the Options Bar. 29 On the View Control Bar. This filters out the steelwork. click Hide/Isolate. The continuous footing foundations. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected. are selected and are displayed in red. Phasing Your Model | 683 . which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. and openings. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. under Phasing. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 25 In the Filter dialog.

33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. under Phasing. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. the slab. After you create the views. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. the walls. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). and click OK. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . click . 35 On the Options Bar. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north).Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. Because this is a renovation project. Phase 1 (south) with demolition. and the footings north of the galleria. the building is displayed as shown. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. and Phase 2 (north) project phases.

and click OK. Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. and click Rename. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. 40 Click No. and click OK. 41 In the Project Browser. In a phase such as Phase 1. The line style of the new work. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Existing. Phasing Your Model | 685 . 50 In the View Properties dialog. new. double click Phase 1 (south). Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. in phase 1. under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Copy of Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. under Floor Plans. Because of this time relationship.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. enter Existing. and click Rename. and click Duplicate. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. right-click Floor. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. 39 In the Rename View dialog. shows as black. and click OK. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. under Phasing. click . demo. 42 In the Project Browser. Because this is a phase-specific view. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. enter Phase 1 (south). under Floor Plans. 48 In the Project Browser. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. under Floor Plans. select Existing for Phase. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. 44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Rename View dialog. which will include planned demolition.

Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. select the interior walls one at a time. Demo Red. New. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and enter Demo Red. however. under Phasing. 53 In the Project Browser. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. double-click Phase 2 (north). it is displayed as a dashed line. and select Show All for Phase Filter.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. demo. As you click each wall. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. The default phase filters are displayed. click New. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. 61 For the Filter Name. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. 59 In the Phasing dialog. and Temporary. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. 58 In the Phasing dialog. new or temporary. 60 Under Filter Name. Existing. select Overridden. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. under Floor Plans. 64 Click OK twice. Demolished. When you demolish the host. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 56 Click OK. under Demolished. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. you demolish all elements hosted by it. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray. In this case. click Filter 1. click the Phase Filters tab.

70 Right-click on each of the copies. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Phase 1 (south). You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. shows as black. the demolished walls are displayed as red. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. and click Rename. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. under Graphics. Phasing Your Model | 687 . Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. select Existing for the Phase value. Because you changed the override. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. double-click Phase 1 (south). 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Phase 2 (north). Because of this time relationship. under 3D Views. under Phasing. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. under Phasing. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. 78 Click OK. 68 Click OK. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. 71 Name the views Existing. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. in phase 1. Phase 1 (south). 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. and click OK. 79 In the Project Browser. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. under Phasing. double-click Existing. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. 76 Under Graphics. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. 74 In the Element Properties dialog. The line style of the new work. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. and Show All for Phase Filter.

as well as 2 views of the building model. you create column. In this exercise. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise.84 Click OK.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. framing. 85 Repeat steps 81 . 86 If you wish to save this file.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. click Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. select Structural Framing. Select Length for Then by. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . Enter Columns .Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Phase 1 for Name. 7 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar. Click OK. select the following fields. Select Grand totals. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK. click Training Files.Phase 1 for Name. select Structural Columns. 4 Under Available Fields. Enter Framing . Clear Itemize every instance. click the Fields tab. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

and click New Sheet. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. expand Sheets (all). Clear Itemize every instance. 14 Under Available Fields. Next.Structural for Name. click the Fields tab. and click Rename. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. click the Fields tab.Phase 1 for Name. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. select Structural Foundations. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the following fields. Select Grand totals. 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Grand totals. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. select the following fields. right-click the new sheet. click OK. Enter Footings . and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Phase 1 . Click OK. Click OK. 9 Under Available Fields. right-click Sheets (all). Clear Itemize every instance.8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet.

22 Expand Schedules. and move the column controls to adjust column width. In this exercise. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . 21 Under 3D views. select each schedule one at a time. 23 On the sheet. expand Floor Plans. and click to place it. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. and click to place them. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. and click to place it.20 In the Project Browser.

692 .

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial.

you specify options that define the model environment. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the pad. and create the perspective view that you want to render. In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. When you complete these changes. After you create the perspective view. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and then render a final exterior view. add trees to the building site. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component.

and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 . click Training Files.

verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . for Materials. 5 Under Construction. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. click Edit. so you can change the render appearance for the material. 9 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New.3 In the drawing area. The Wood . Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 7 Click OK 3 times. and on the Options Bar. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Teak. select the wooden screen wall. select Wood . Solid. click Replace. satin-finished teak. Solid. click Properties).Teak. for Structure.Teak. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall.

which is using a default material.Cast-in-Place Concrete. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Satin Varnish. and click OK. 20 Click the Graphics tab. click <By Category>. but it is the closest material to what you want. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. and click . 19 On the Render Appearance tab. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. click Edit/New. select Concrete . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. select Broom Straight. click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss.11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 13 Click Update Preview. select the pad. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Modify. for Finish. and review the material patterns. 18 In the Materials dialog. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. You do not want the medium gloss finish. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click (Element Properties). 16 Under Construction. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Click OK 4 times. for the Structure [1] Material value. and click Update Preview. for Finish. and click OK. for Structure.

the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. You create a black anodized aluminum material. and click OK. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. select Metal . enter Metal . Anodized . 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. click (Duplicate). review the material appearance (color and pattern). and click OK. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. click Replace. 25 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the Render Appearance Library.Aluminum.Black. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog.Aluminum. 698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. By selecting this option. for Name. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click OK. click Aluminum Anodized Black.

for Curtain Wall Mullions. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . select Metal . click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar.Aluminum.32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click 34 In the Materials dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category.Black. 35 Click OK twice. select the Material value. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. select Region. Anodized . 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog. . 33 In the Object Styles dialog.

700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . NOTE The smaller the region. the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. mullions. 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly. and pad).

Several quality settings are available. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. click Show the model.rvt. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Under Lighting. for Scheme. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. on the Rendering dialog. after the rendering process completes. under Display.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701. select Exterior: Sun only. The higher the quality. select Sunlight from top left. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . For Sun. select Medium. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. 44 To display the building model. for Setting. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. the longer the rendering process will take. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.

and double-click Site. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. but any type and size can be used. when you render an exterior view of the model. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. the RPC model is used in the rendering. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .In a later exercise. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. NOTE For simplicity.rvt. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. they can be loaded from the Content Library. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. right-click in the Design Bar. click Site Component. similar to the locations shown. select RPC Tree . and click Site. Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . 4 In the Type Selector. and place 2 trees in the project. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.30'.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. (Exact placement is not important. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help. as shown.) 6 In the Type Selector. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio.Deciduous : Red Maple . near the walkway.

704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Rename. click Edit/New.Deciduous : Honey Locust . Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.42'. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family.7 In the Type Selector.18'.Deciduous : Scarlet Oak .25'. 13 Click OK twice. and click OK. enter 18'. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. and on the Options Bar. select RPC Tree . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). for Height. select RPC Tree . for New. enter Honey Locust . 11 In the Rename dialog.

click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View on page 705. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View | 705 .

706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. The perspective view displays. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

under Floor Plans. as necessary. Depending on camera placement. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. right-click 3D View 1.3 Zoom out. and select the crop boundary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. If the camera is not shown in the view. in the Project Browser. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and adjust the field of vision. double-click Site. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. With the camera shown. and click Show Camera. as shown. Creating a Perspective View | 707 .

under 3D Views. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day. double-click Exterior . 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Exterior . and click OK. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file.6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 8 In the Project Browser.

you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views.Day.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. You then duplicate the view. modify render settings. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 .

8 Under Quality. 7 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. You create a location and time for the rendering. In this case. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format.Santa Monica. NOTE If a background image is required. under Background. 5 In the Rename dialog.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. select Medium. 6 Click OK twice. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. select Sky: Cloudy. You adjust cloud settings as required. and click Rename. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. enter Spring Equinox . select Edit/New. for Sun. for New. and click Render. 710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Lighting. select Spring Equinox.

13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png). click Show the rendering. select Portable Network Graphics (*. After the image is rendered. For Files of type. click Show the model. 10 In the Rendering dialog. Click Save. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Export.9 In the Rendering dialog.

under Group Options. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night.Day view to Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 22 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W . right-click Exterior . and click Move to Group. click Dialog).Night view open. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . and click OK. and select the last light. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. under Ungrouped Lights. you duplicate the view and change the settings.Flat Round : 60W . select the first light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. enter Pool Lights. under 3D Views. select Exterior: Artificial only.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . enter Pool House Lights. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Ungrouped Lights. click New.Flat Round : 60W . and click Artificial Lights.120V. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . on the View Control Bar. under Group Options. add 30 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . for Name. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. dialog. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Night. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. press and hold SHIFT. click OK. 25 Using the same method.120V to the Pool Lights group.Day.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. for Name. click New. 16 With the Exterior . To select a sequential list. for Scheme. under Lighting. 27 In the Rendering dialog.Exterior . verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click OK.

29 In the Exposure Control dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. under Image. click Show the model. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. and click OK. enter 4.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session. After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View | 713 . In this example. you change the brightness of the exposure. click Adjust Exposure. for Exposure Value.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and finally.rvt.

Exact placement is not important. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. ■ (Rotate). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. and on the Edit toolbar. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 4 In the Type Selector. the person’s line of sight. and place the component inside the pool house. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. 6 Select the figure. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. Adding RPC People | 715 . double-click Level 1. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. under Floor Plans. click Component.

click Edit.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 13 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. you can enable this option. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. under Parameters. click Edit/New. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. click (Element Properties). By default. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click Modify. 14 Save the file. select Cast Reflections. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK 3 times. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. click Camera.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 .15 Proceed to the next exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering.The perspective view displays. right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box. under 3D Views. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click OK. and click Properties.

10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. double-click Level 1. 8 In the Project Browser. In order to accurately adjust the section box. in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South. under Floor Plans.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 .

size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click.12 In the floor plan view. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. 13 In the South Elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

18 Proceed to the next exercise. and render the interior view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . doors that contain windows or glass. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view. 17 Save the file. and curtain walls.

for Setting. 4 In the Rendering dialog. you turn them off for this scene. select Interior: Artificial only.Night. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. under Lighting.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 8 In the Rendering dialog. c_Pool_House_in_progress. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. and click Rename. click Render.rvt. under 3D Views. You can specify a lower quality. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. select Draft. right-click 3D View 1. enter Interior . and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. clear Pool Lights. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Quality. for Scheme. After these settings are established. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 2 In the Rename View dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.

This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. in order to turn on daylight portals. and click OK. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Spring Equinox . 17 In the Rendering dialog. see the Revit Structure Online Help. select Interior: Sun only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. for Scheme. the daylight portals can be turned on. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . The preset schemes are read-only. click 14 For Setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . you must create a custom setting. 3pm. for Daylight Portal Options. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. and click Render. select Curtain Walls. select Edit. (Show Rendering Dialog).Day. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You create a view for the interior during the day.9 Close the Rendering dialog. In this case. 13 In the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. For more information on daylight portals. For sunlit interiors. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.Santa Monica. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. select Region.Night. click Copy To Custom. By default they are turned off. right-click Interior . for Sun. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.

under Image. In the next steps. select the column on the right. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 10. For Saturation. click Show the model. enter 1. and close the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK.18 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Properties). you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.

under Output Settings. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. select Printer. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. for Setting. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select Scale (locked proportions). 26 Click Update Preview. You change the varnish setting. click OK. 24 In the Materials dialog. enter 5''. select the crop boundary.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . 30 In the drawing area. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and on the Options Bar. 23 With the column still selected. As size and DPI are increased. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.6. For Rotate. For Amount. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. For Width. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. For Bump. select High. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Unfinished. for Resolution. enter 90. and click OK. select Wood. clear Region. and click Render. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. add a bump map to create texture. Click OK. the render time increases significantly. click the dimensions for Size.

Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames.The rendered image displays. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. The walkthrough path is a spline. or section view. but you can also define it in a 3D. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. In a plan view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. independent of the Revit Structure software. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Usually. elevation. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.

■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. proceeds through the dining room. expand Views (all). you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. verify that Perspective is selected. and change unit formats as desired. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you prefer to use metric values. click Walkthrough. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. click Training Files. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. expand Floor Plans. click Settings ➤ Project Units. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. click Finish. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

13 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 16 On the Options Bar. If it is not. enter 9''. click Edit Walkthrough. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). for Width. verify that Field of view is selected. and for Height. 17 Click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 16''. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. 12 On the View menu. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . select the crop boundary. enter 1. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. for Frame. and click OK. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. on the Options Bar. 14 Click . Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click the dimensions for Size.

The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. proceed to the next exercise. press ESC. clear Far Clip Active.rvt. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Floor Plans. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 In the Element Properties dialog.The walkthrough plays. and click OK. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. double-click 1st Floor. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. under Extents. click (Element Properties). c_Townhouse. click Edit Walkthrough. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . 6 On the Options Bar.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

under Walkthroughs. enter 15. hidden line. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. shading with edges. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 3 Under Format. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . for Model Graphics Style. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. double-click Walkthrough 1. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. under Output Length. c_Townhouse. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. or rendering. and click OK. The walkthrough is recorded. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system.rvt. shading. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Edit Walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. select <Shading>. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. If you are unsure of what option to use. without opening Revit Structure 2009. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and click Save. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. specifying the number of frames. reducing the size of the image. for Frames/sec. click File menu ➤ Save As. for Compressor. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. on the Options Bar. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 To play the walkthrough.

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this exercise. mansard. Before you can sketch the roof profile. gutters. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 733 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. In this lesson. including hip. In addition. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. shed. You do not need to create the work plane.Roofs 23 In this lesson. In this tutorial. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. and low sloped roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you learn how to add fascia. gable.

rvt. expand Views (all). and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 4 Click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and open Imperial\i_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. select Name.

centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on). 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2.

Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Next. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.

so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and double-click Section 1. press TAB. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and select the second wall. press CTRL. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 19 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Views (all). Next. expand Sections (Type 1). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. click Modify. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 21 In the Project Browser. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 18 Select the edge of the roof.

click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. click Attach for Top/Base.

expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. i_Roofs. 3 In the Project Browser. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and click Yes. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. verify that Defines slope is selected. 5 On the Options Bar. Because you are in a three-dimensional view.rvt. Next. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. and double-click Garage Roof. expand Views (all). you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. sketch the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang.

click Modify. and click OK. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 8 On the Options Bar. click the model. 15 On the View toolbar. click (Properties). click Finish Roof. and on the Options Bar. Next. 14 When you see the informational dialog.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. 11 Press CTRL. clear Defines slope. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . under Dimensions. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. By default. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 13 On the Design Bar. select both slope definition lines.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. press TAB. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.rvt. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. i_Roofs. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 6 Click to select all the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Pick Walls. When you complete the roof. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. sketch the chimney opening. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines slope. Next. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls.

11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 17 When you see the informational dialog. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options bar. click Lines. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 18 On the View toolbar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click (Rectangle).

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. close the roof sketch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 7 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Next.19 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. i_Roofs.rvt. click Lines. and click (Pick Lines). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls.

9 On the Tools toolbar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Roof Properties. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. raise the roof 2' above the current level. 11 To trim the first line segment. 10 On the Options Bar. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 14 Under Constraints. using the following illustration for guidance. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next.

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). 17 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 . 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.16 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Next. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs.

9 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. select the left vertical roof line. 10 To trim the first line segment. 6 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. Next. Next. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . press TAB. click (Trim/Extend). click Pick Walls. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Views (all). 8 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. you add a slope-defining line. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 4 On the Options Bar.

you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Modify. expand 3D Views. and click OK. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . (SteeringWheels). expand Views (all). i_Roofs. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 19 On the View toolbar. enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click 20 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. 16 Under Constraints. click Roof Properties. and press ENTER. 13 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. clear Defines Slope. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to add two reference planes. click (Pick Lines). To help locate the position of each split. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Modify.15 to add the second slope arrow. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 11 On the Design Bar. click Slope Arrow. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 9 On the Tools menu. 14 On the Options Bar.5 On the View menu. click Split Walls and Lines. Next. click Ref Plane. Before you can add slope arrows. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. add two new slope arrows. Next.

20 Under Dimensions. 5 On the Options Bar. click Align Eaves. (Properties). Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. enter 12'' for Rise/12". Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. and then click OK. and double-click Garage Roof. 18 Press CTRL. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. (Properties). This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. i_Roofs. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. on the Options Bar. enter 6'' for Rise/12". select Slope for Specify. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 3 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. When eave heights differ. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. select both slope arrows. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. the adjacent eave heights must align. click Modify. select Defines Slope. When aligning eaves.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. expand Floor Plans. The eave lines display with a dimension. and click OK.rvt. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . under Dimensions. When you sketch a hip roof. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. expand Views (all).

Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . click Training Files. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 14 If you want to save your changes. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Finish Roof.rvt. on the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Save As. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.Next. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select a method to align the eaves. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 10 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (all). 7 In the Project Browser.1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. expand Views (all). under Constraints. and double-click North. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. click Lines. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Elevations. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Next. click Modify. on the Options Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. 6 On the View toolbar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. (Properties). 3 Select the roof and. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

click Finish Roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . click Save As. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . and select the remaining three lines. under Dimensions. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. press TAB. on the File menu.10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. 17 On the View toolbar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and then select Defines slope. click mansard roof. enter 3'' for Rise/12". click (Pick Lines). and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.

rvt. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click Pick Walls. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. After you add the roof. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 3 On the Design Bar. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a roof to a building shell. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Trim/Extend).4 On the Options Bar. Because the walls are not continuous. 7 On the Tools toolbar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 5 In the drawing area. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry.

8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. double-click the section head to open the section view. 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Insulation on Metal Deck . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.EPDM. click Finish Roof. and click OK. select Steel Truss . click Roof Properties. for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. Open a section view 12 In the drawing area.

and click to select it. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 16 On the Options Bar. 18 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. In the next steps. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.The roof has been created. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click Roof. click (Draw Split Lines). Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. move the cursor horizontally to the left. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Next. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. on the Options Bar. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. and select a point on the opposite roof line.You create a split line vertically down the center. 20 Using the same method. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. (Add points).

for the dimension. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.In this exercise. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. 25 Using the same method. exact placement of the points is not important. enter -2''. You modify the points individually. 23 On the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. and press ENTER.

29 On the Design Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions.The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. enter 4''. 27 Press and hold CTRL. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and select all of the roof edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). for Elevation. click Modify. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click Edit/New. 35 Click OK 3 times. click (Properties). 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Variable. 36 View the results in the section view. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. The entire slab is sloped. under Construction. By making the insulation layer variable. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Edit. for Structure. 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area.Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. for the Thermal/Air Layer.

and Soffits In this lesson.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. 39 Proceed to the next lesson.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 If you want to save your changes.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 5 On the Options Bar. Gutters. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 3 Press CTRL. select Fascia-Built-Up. After you create a roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Creating Fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium. and soffits. on the File menu. click Training Files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. Gutters. and soffits in Revit Structure. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. gutters. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Properties). you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and Soffits on page 762. gutters. you can easily create its fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Fascia.

10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 .7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile. under Construction. and click OK twice. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Gutters on page 764. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 8 In the Name dialog. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. and click OK.

and click OK three times. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter.rvt. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 3 In the Properties dialog. . 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. click Duplicate. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK. click Edit/New. 2 On the Options Bar. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. c_Condominium. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. under Construction. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Creating Soffits on page 765. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Roof.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. expand Views.rvt. Creating Soffits | 765 .

and then select the soffit to join them. 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs . expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry.

Creating Soffits | 767 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

768 .

the host group is also updated automatically. place. hotel rooms. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. For example. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. or with those working on a different project. In this exercise. Creating. The new group is considered nested within the host group. In this tutorial. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Modifying. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you not only simplify their placement. After you create a model group. By grouping objects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. 769 . This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and typical office layouts. all instances in the building model are updated. You mirror one instance of the group. You can also nest groups within other groups. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and modify repetitive units. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. When you make changes to a nested group. In another exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click in the drawing area. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click Training Files. 770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. and double-click First Floor. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. expand Views (all).

5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . 4 On the Edit toolbar.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.14 On the Edit toolbar. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 . and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored. click Modify. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 777 . Modifying a Group In this exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Save As. and click Save. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click to select it. press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. When you finish editing.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.

). 8 On the Design Bar. select the element.). NOTE To display an excluded element. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping .3 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member. click Modify.). and click member to group instance. press TAB.

clear Tag on Placement. click Door. 11 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 12 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Modifying a Group | 779 . 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 13 In the Type Selector. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Modify. click Wall.

the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Edit Group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.16 On the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. In edit group mode. 22 In the drawing area. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.

28 On the group editor toolbar. you add the Typical Kitchen group. for Unconnected Height. enter 3' 4''. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 7'.24 On the Design Bar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. which acts as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Finish. under Constraints. click 27 For Base Offset. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 781 . (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 25 Select the opening. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. created in an earlier lesson. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.

5 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. in the Project Browser. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group.rvt.

and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 783 . under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

such as door and window tags. you add door tags to a group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. In the next exercise. and filled regions. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.rvt. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and select a point below the left elevator.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar.

enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click to add an arc leader. 12 Enter Tile. and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. and on the Design Bar. click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click Modify. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click (Group). and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. as shown. 14 On the Edit toolbar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.

it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 21 In the drawing area. under Groups. 22 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Because the detail group contains variables. double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. expand Detail. and click Create Instance.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser.

Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. clear Leader. as shown. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.manner that a drawing component can be added. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.

click (Group). click Check None. click (Filter Selection). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. 9 On the Edit toolbar. select Door Tags. 8 In the Filter dialog. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . 11 In the Project Browser.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 14 On the Options Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 16 On the Design Bar. click Place Detail. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and click OK. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Modify. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. therefore. When you load the group from the library into a new project.

accept the default template file. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click Modify.rvt.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. verify that Project is selected. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and expand Model. browse to the Desktop. 3 For File name.rvt. In this case. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click OK. and click Save Group. under Groups\Model. 5 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. expand Groups. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 . right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 12 On the Design Bar. click Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. select 2 Bedroom Unit. click OK. for Create new. verify that Same as group name is selected. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. and click Create Instance. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. A warning dialog displays. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.

17 On the Design Bar.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. When a group is converted to a link. and the link is removed. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Modify. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Training Files. click Use Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. expand Revit Links. verify that Attached Details is selected only.rvt. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Remove Link. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model. click Bind. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Link. 24 In the message dialog. click OK.